JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025

GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE

PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_Unit and Dimension, Vectors, Kinematics, NLM &
Friction
SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:18)
Single Correct Answer Type 6 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. 1
Given graph is vs velocity graph. If the time interval during which velocity changes from 2m/s
acceleration
to 4m/s is given by Δ t seconds. Then find the value of 2 Δ t :-

(A) 3 (B) 4 (C) 5 (D) 6

2. A boatman moves his boat with a velocity ‘v’ (relative to water) in river and finds to his surprise that velocity
of river ‘u’ (with respect to ground) is more than ‘v’. He has to reach a point directly opposite to the starting
point on another bank by travelling minimum possible distance. Then

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) he must steer the boat (with velocity v) at certain angle with river flow so that he can reach the
opposite point on other bank directly.
(B) his velocity ‘v’ must be towards directly opposite point, So, that he can travel rest of distance by
walking on other bank to reach the directly opposite point.
(C) boatman should maintain velocity v of boat at certain angle greater than 90° with direction of river
flow to minimize drifting and then walk rest of distance on other bank.
(D) boat velocity ‘v’ should be at an angle less than 90° with direction of river flow to minimize the
drift and then walk to the point.
3. Suppose you are anchored near the shore of a channel in which there is steady current, and you are going to
run your (motor) boat at constant throttle to a dock directly across the channel on the opposite shore. The way
in which one might steer the boat to the dock is pointing method. In pointing method keep the nose of the boat
pointed directly at the dock. Velocity of boat with respect to water is ‘v’ and velocity of water is ‘u’. Width of
water channel is ‘b’. The time taken by boat to reach the dock is :-

(A) bv (B) b (C) bu (D) bv

v2 − u2 √ v2 − u2 v2 u2

PHYSICS/ GR # U&D, Vectors, Kinematics, NLM & E-1/9

Friction (1)
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

4. When a man started from rest with constant acceleration along an incline plane of angle 37°, from horizontal
he found rain to be falling vertically. After t seconds, he finds rain to strike him horizontally. Assume that
actual velocity of rain is constant with magnitude 4 m/s. Choose the correct option(s) :
(A) Man is moving up the incline with acceleration of 1 m/s2 if t = 5 sec.
(B) Man is moving down the incline and if a = 1 m/s2 then t = 5 sec.
(C) Man is moving down the incline and if t = 20 /3 s then a = 1 m/s2
(D) Man is moving up the incline and if a = 1 m/s2 then t = 20/3 s.
5. Two monkeys of masses 10 kg and 8 kg are moving along a vertical light rope, the former climbing up with an
acceleration of 2 m/s2, while the latter coming down with a uniform velocity of 2 m/s. Find tension in the rope
at the fixed support.

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) 180 N (B) 200 N (C) 80 N (D) 216 N
6. The system of two weights with masses m1 and m2 are connected with weightless spring as shown. The system
is resting on the support S. The support S is quickly removed. The accelerations of each of the weights right
after the support S is removed are.

(A) (m1 + m2 )g (B) (m1 + m2 )g

a1 = 0, a2 = a1 = 0, a2 =
m2 m1
(C) (m1 + m2 )g (D) a1 = 0, a2 = 0
a1 = , a2 = 0
m1
E-2/9 PHYSICS/ GR # U&D, Vectors, Kinematics, NLM &
(2) Friction
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 32)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 8 Q. [4 M (–2)]
7. In terms of potential difference V, electric current I, permittivity ε 0, permeability µ0 and speed of light c, the
dimensionally correct equation(s) is(are) :-
(A) µ0I2 = ε 0V2 (B) ε 0I = µ0V (C) I = ε 0cV (D) µ0cI = ε 0V
8. dv(t)
The motion of a body is given by the equation = 6.0 – 3 v(t); where v (t) is the speed in m/s & t in sec.,
dt
if the body was at rest at t = 0 :
(A) the terminal speed is 2.0 m/s
(B) the magnitude of the initial acceleration is 6.0 m/s²
(C) the speed varies with time as v(t) = 2 (1 – e –3t) m/s
(D) the speed is 1.0 m/s when the acceleration is half the initial value.
9. Positions of two vehicles A and B with reference to origin O and their velocities are as shown.

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) they will collide (B) distance of closest approach is 100 m.
(C) their relative speed is 40 (D) their relative velocity is 20
m/s m/s
√ 3 √ 3
10. River is flowing with a velocity →vR = 4i^ ms−1 . A boat is moving with a velocity −2i^ + 4j^ ms –1 relative to
( )

river and width of river is 100 m along y direction then-

(A) The time of crossing is 25 sec. (B) Absolute velocity of boat is 2 5 ms –1 √

(C) Drift of boat is 50 m. (D) The boat can never cross the river.
11. A carpenter of mass 50 kg is standing on a weighing machine placed in a lift of mass 20 kg. A light string is
attached to the lift. The string passes over a smooth pulley and the other end is held by the carpenter as shown.
When carpenter keeps the lift moving upward with constant velocity :- (g = 10 m/s2)

(A) the reading of weighing machine is 15 kg. (B) the man applies a force of 350 N on the string.
(C) net force on the man is 150 N. (D) Net force on the weighing machine is 150 N.
PHYSICS/ GR # U&D, Vectors, Kinematics, NLM & E-3/9
Friction (3)
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

12. A block placed on a rough horizontal surface is pushed with a force F acting horizontally on the block. The
magnitude of F is increased and acceleration produced is plotted in the graph shown.

(A) Mass of the block is 2 kg.

(B) Coefficient of friction between block and surface is 0.5.
(C) Limiting friction between block and surface is 10 N.
(D) When F = 8 N, friction between block and surface is 10 N.
13. Two blocks m1 and m2 are connected with a compressed spring and placed on a smooth horizontal surface as
shown in figure. Force constant of spring is k. Under the influence of forces F1 and F2, at an instant blocks
move with common acceleration a0. At that instant force F2 is suddenly withdrawn. Mark correct option.

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) Instantaneous acceleration of m is a –
1 0
F1 (B) Instantaneous acceleration of m is a = a +
2 2 0
F2
m1 m2
(C) Instantaneous acceleration of m1 is a1 = a0 (D) Spring force is Fspring = m2a0 + F2
14. Three blocks A, B & C are arranged as shown. Pulleys and strings are ideal. All surfaces are frictionless. If
block C is observed moving down along the incline at 1 m/s2. Then :- (system is released from rest.)

(A) The mass of block B is 15 kg.

(B) Tension in string is 15 N .
(C) Acceleration of A and B are 5 m/s2 and 9 m/s2 respectively.
(D) Acceleration of A and B are 9 m/s2 and 5 m/s2 respectively.

E-4/9 PHYSICS/ GR # U&D, Vectors, Kinematics, NLM &

(4) Friction
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (iii) : (Maximum Marks: 21)
Linked Comprehension Type (Single Option Correct) (1 Para × 3 Q.) (2 Para × 2 Q.) [3 M (–1)]
Paragraph for Questions 15 and 16
At t = 0 on the planet "Gravitus Increasicus", a projectile is fired with speed 6 m/s at an angle 30° above the
horizontal. This planet is a strange one, in that the acceleration due to gravity increases linearly with time,
starting with a value of zero when the projectile is fired. In other words, g(t) = 2t.
15. The time of flight of the projectile is :-
(A) 1 sec (B) 2 sec (C) 3 sec (D) 3 3 sec
√

16. Range of the projectile is :-

(B) 9
(A) 9m m (C) 6√ 3 m (D) 9√ 3 m
√3
Paragraph for Questions 17 and 18
A large heavy box is sliding without friction down a smooth plane of inclination θ . From a point P on the
bottom of the box, a particle is projected inside the box. The initial speed of the particle with respect to box is
u and the direction of projection makes an angle a with the bottom as shown in figure.

Rankers Academy JEE

17. Find the distance along the bottom of the box between the point of projection P and the point Q where the
particle lands. (Assume that the particle does not hit any other surface of the box. Neglect air resistance).
(A) u2 sin 2 θ (B) u2 sin 2 α (C) u2 sin 2 θ (D) u2 sin 2 α
g cos α g cos θ g sin α g sin θ
18. If the horizontal displacement of the particle as seen by an observer on the ground is zero, find the speed of the
box with respect to the ground at the instant when the particle was projected.
(A) u sin( α + θ ) (B) u sin( α + θ ) (C) u cos( α + θ ) (D) u cos( α + θ )
v= v= v= v=
cos θ sin θ cos θ sin θ
Paragraph for Questions 19 - 21

19. The maximum F which will not cause motion of any of the blocks is
(A) 10 N (B) 15 N (C) data insufficient (D) None
20. The maximum acceleration of 5 kg block is :-
(A) 1 m/s2 (B) 3 m/s2 (C) 0 (D) None
21. The acceleration of 10 kg block when F = 30 N is
(A) 2 m/s2 (B) 3 m/s2 (C) 1 m/s2 (D) None

PHYSICS/ GR # U&D, Vectors, Kinematics, NLM & E-5/9

Friction (5)
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (iv) : (Maximum Marks: 16)
Linked Comprehension Type (Multiple Options Correct) 1 Para × 4 Q. [4 M (–1)]
Paragraph for Questions 22 - 25
The system shown in the figure is initially in equilibrium. A is of mass 2m and B, C, D and E are of mass m.

22. When spring 1 is cut, then the acceleration of each blocks will be :-
(A) aA = g ↓ (B) 2g (C) aE = 0 (D) aE = g ↓
aD = ↓
3
23. When spring 2 is cut, then the acceleration of each blocks will be :-

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) aA = 0 (B) aB =
g
3
↓ (C) aB =
2g
3
↑

24. When string between C & D is cut, then the acceleration of each blocks will be :-
(D) aE = g ↓

(A) aA = 0 (B) aE = 0 (C) aA = g ↓ (D) aE = g ↓

25. When string between B and C is cut, then the acceleration of each blocks will be :-
(A) aA = 0 (B) aE = 0 (C) aA = g ↓ (D) aE = g ↓
SECTION-II (i) : (Maximum Marks: 8)
Numerical Answer type Questions (Upto Second Decimal Place) 2 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. A 1kg block B rests as shown on a bracket A of same mass. Constant forces F1 = 20N and F2 = 8N start to act
at time t = 0 when the distance of block B from pulley is 50cm. Time when block B reaches the pulley is
_________.

E-6/9 PHYSICS/ GR # U&D, Vectors, Kinematics, NLM &

(6) Friction
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

2. A circular disc with a groove along its diameter is placed horizontally. A block of mass 1 kg is placed as
shown. The co-efficient of friction between the block and all surfaces of groove in contact is μ = 2/5. The disc
has an acceleration of 25 m/s2. Find the acceleration of the block with respect to disc.

SECTION-II (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 8)

Numerical-Answer-Type questions (Non Negative Integer) 2 Q. [4 M (0)]
3. A bird is at a point P (4, – 1, – 5) and sees two points P1 ( – 1, – 1, 0) and P2 (3, – 1, – 3). At time t = 0, it starts
flying with a constant speed of 10 m/s to be in line with points P1 and P2 in minimum possible time t. Find t
(in sec), if all coordinates are in kilometers.
4. A bow man is riding on a horse moving with speed of 2 2 ms –1 along a straight road. He aims at his enemy moving
√

perpendicularly to the road at speed of 2 ms –1. At the instant when he fires the arrow, the line joining man and his
√

Rankers Academy JEE

enemy makes an angle of 45° with the road. Find the angle (in degree) with the road at which he should aim to hit
his enemy? Muzzle velocity of arrow is 5ms –1. (given that sin 37° = 3/5). Neglect effect of gravity.

SECTION-III : (Maximum Marks: 24)

Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 6 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. You are standing on the Chambal Bridge watching the boats in the river. You see a motorboat pass directly
below you, traveling perpendicular to the bridge at a speed of 3 m/s. A person on the boat throws a baseball at
an initial speed of v0 and at an angle of 37° from the vertical (Note: both v0 and the angle are with respect to
the boat). Find the value of v0 (in m/s) necessary for the ball to travel straight up towards you.

PHYSICS/ GR # U&D, Vectors, Kinematics, NLM & E-7/9

Friction (7)
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

2. In the given figure points A and C are on the horizontal ground & A and B are in same vertical plane.
Simultaneously bullets are fired from A, B and C and they collide at D. The bullet at B is fired horizontally
72 54
with speed of km/hr and the bullet at C is projected vertically upward at velocity of km/hr. Find
5 5
velocity of the bullet projected from A in m/s.

3. A board is being moved with a cosntant velocity v0 on a smooth horizontal plane. A small block is projected
on the rough boards. Coefficient of friction between board and block is μ = 0.3. Block is projected with
velocity v1 = 25 m/s at an angle of θ = 37° relative to ground. What is the velocity of block (in m/s) relative to
ground after time t = 10 sec.

4. Rankers Academy JEE

Figure shows a ball of mass m connected with two ideal springs of force constant k, kept in equilibrium on a
smooth incline, suddenly right spring is cut. What is magnitude of instantaneous acceleration (in m/s2) of ball.

5. A 1 kg block moving on horizontal rough surface of friction coefficient 0.6 is pushed with a force varying with
time t in seconds as shown in figure. If initial velocity of block was 4.5 m/s. Find the velocity (in m/s) at t = 3
s.

E-8/9 PHYSICS/ GR # U&D, Vectors, Kinematics, NLM &

(8) Friction
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

6. Four blocks are arranged on a smooth horizontal surface as shown. The masses of the blocks are given (see the
diagram). The coefficient of static friction between the top and the bottom blocks is μ s. If the maximum value
of the horizontal force F, applied to one of the bottom blocks as shown, that makes all four blocks move with
m+M
the same acceleration is 2 μ s mg ( , Then find the value of α .
)
αm + M

SECTION-IV : (Maximum Marks: 8)

Matrix Match Type (4 × 5) (One or more options correct) 1 Q. [8 M; (for each entry +2(0)]
1. The figure shows a block B of mass 2 kg kept on a smooth horizontal floor in equilibrium with two identical
springs of S1 & S2 force constant k = 100 N/m attached to it and to fixed supports as shown. The block is then
displaced horizontally from this position by amount x and released. Match the initial equilibrium conditions &
subsequent values of x in column-I with corresponding acceleration of the block when released in column II.

Column-I Column-II

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) S1 and S2 are relaxed and x = 2 cm. (P) 6 m/s2
(B) S1 and S2 are stretched by 1 cm and x = 2 cm (Q) 4 m/s2
(C) S1 and S2 are compressed by 2 cm and x = 4 cm (R) 3 m/s2
(D) S1 and S2 are compressed by 4 cm and x = 1 cm (S) 2 m/s2
(T) 1 m/s2

PHYSICS/ GR # U&D, Vectors, Kinematics, NLM & E-9/9

Friction (9)
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
ANSWER KEY GR_Unit and Dimension, Vectors, Kinematics, NLM &
Friction
PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6
SECTION-I (i)
A. A C A C B A
Q. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
SECTION-I (ii)
A. A,C A,B,C,D B,C A,B,C A,B A,B,C B,C,D A,B,C

Q. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
SECTION-I (iii)
A. C D B C A C A
Q. 22 23 24 25
SECTION-I (iv)
A. A,B,C A,B,D A,B A,B
Q. 1 2
SECTION-II (i)
A. 0.5 10
Q. 3 4
SECTION-II (ii)
A. 100 82
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6
SECTION-III
A. 5 5 8 5 0 2

Q. 1
SECTION-IV
A. A->S,B->S,C->Q,D->T

Rankers Academy JEE

(10)
KTJAPHELGR25001 HS-1/1
Rankers Academy JEE

(11)
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_Circular Motion, Work, Power & Energy
SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:21)
Single Correct Answer Type 7 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. A particle A moves along a circle of radius R = 50 cm so that its radius vector r relative to the point O (figure)
rotates with the constant angular velocity ω = 0.40 rad/s. Then modulus of the velocity of the particle, and the
modulus of its total acceleration will be

(A) v= 0.4 m/s, a = 0.4 m/s2 (B) v = 0.32 m/s, a = 0.32 m/s2
(C) v = 0.32 m/s, a = 0.4 m/s2 (D) v = 0.4 m/s, a = 0.32 m/s2
2. A hollow vertical cylinder of radius r and height h has a smooth internal surface. A small particle is placed in
contact with the inner side of the upper rim, at point A, and given a horizontal speed u, tangential to the rim. It
leaves the lower rim at point B, vertically below A. If n is an integer then

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) u 2h (B) h (C) 2 π r (D) u
√ =n =n =n =n
2πr g 2πr h √
2gh
3. A carriage of mass M and length ℓ is joined to the end of a slope as shown in the figure. A block of mass m is
released from the slope from height h. It slides till end of the carriage. The friction between the mass and the
slope and also friction between carriage and horizontal floor is negligible. Coefficient of friction between
block and carriage is μ . Find h in the given terms.

(A) μ M (B) 2 μ M (C) μ m (D) μ m

( 1+ ) ℓ ( 1+ ) ℓ ( 2+ ) ℓ ( 1+ ) ℓ
m m M M

PHYSICS/ GR_Circular Motion, Work, Power & Energy (1) E-1/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

4. Consider a pendulum, consisting of a massless string with a mass on the end. The mass is held with the string
horizontal, and then released. The mass swings down, and then on its way back up, the string is cut at point P
when it makes an angle of θ with the vertical. What should θ be, so that the mass travels the largest horizontal
distance from P by the time it returns to the height it had when the string was cut?

(B) 1 (C) 1
(A) tan−1 √3 tan−1 ( ) tan−1 ( ) (D) tan –1(1)
√ 3 √ 2
5. A uniform chain has a mass M and length L. It is placed on a frictionless table with length ℓ 0 hanging over the
edge. The chain begins to slide down. The speed V with which the chain slides away from the edge is given by
(A) gℓ0 (B) gℓ0 (C) g 2 (D)
(L − ℓ )
V =√ 2 V = √2g (L − ℓ 0 )
V =√ (L + ℓ 0 ) V =√ (L − ℓ 0 ) 0
L L L
6. A ring of mass m slide from rest on the smooth rod as shown in the figure, due to the block of mass m. Pully
and string are massless. Then find the speed of ring when the string become straight. (Given θ = 60°)

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) 4√gh (B) √

2gh (C) 2√2gh (D) 8√gh
7. x2
A man M slides down a curved frictionless track, starting from rest. The curve obeys the equation y = . The
2
tangential acceleration of man is :

(B) gx (C) g (D) gx

(A) g
√ x2 + 4 2 √ x2 + 1

E-2/8 (2) PHYSICS/ GR_Circular Motion, Work, Power & Energy

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 16)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 4 Q. [4 M (–2)]
8. An ant travels along a long rod with a constant velocity →u relative to the rod starting from the origin. The rod
is kept initially along the positive x-axis. At t = 0, the rod also starts rotating with an angular velocity ω
(anticlockwise) in x-y plane about origin. Then
(A) the position of the ant at any time t is →r = ut[cos ω ti^ + sin ω tj^]
(B) the speed of the ant at any time t is u √ 1 + ω 2 t2

(C) the magnitude of the tangential acceleration of the ant at any time t is ω 2 tu
√ 1 + ω 2 t2
(D) the speed of the ant at any time t is √ 1 + 2 ω 2 t2 u
9. Which of the following is/are conservative force(s)?
(C) ^ (D) ^
(A) → = 2r3 ^r
F (B) → = − 5 ^r
F → = 3(x i + y j )
F → = 3(y i + x j )
F
r 3/2 3/2
(x2 + y 2 ) (x2 + y 2 )
10. On a train moving along east with a constant speed v, a boy revolves a bob with string of length ℓ on smooth
surface of a train, with equal constant speed v relative to train. Mark the correct option(s).

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) Maximum speed of bob is 2 v in ground frame.
(B) Tension in string connecting bob is 4mv2
at an instant.
ℓ
(C) Tension in string is mv2
at all the moments.
ℓ
(D) Minimum speed of bob is zero in ground frame.
11. A spring block system is placed on a rough horizontal surface having coefficient of friction m. Spring is given
initial elongation 3µmg/k (where m = mass of block and k = spring constant) and the block is released from
rest. For the subsequent motion :-

(A) initial acceleration of block is 2 μ g. (B) maximum compression in spring is μ mg/k.

(C) maximum speed of the block is 2 μ g √
m
. (D) maximum speed of the block is μ g √
m
.
k k

PHYSICS/ GR_Circular Motion, Work, Power & Energy (3) E-3/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (iii) : (Maximum Marks: 9)
Linked Comprehension Type (Single Option Correct) 1 Para × 3 Q. [3 M (–1)]
Paragraph for Questions 12 - 14
The potential energy at a point, relative to the reference point is defined as the negative of work done by the
conservative force as the object moves from the reference point to the point considered. The value of potential
energy at the reference point itself can be set equal to zero because we are always concerned only with
differences of potential energy between two points and the associated change of kinetic energy. A particle A
is fixed at origin of a fixed coordinate system. Another particle B which is free to move experiences an force
→ = (− 2 α + β
F ) r^ due to particle A where →r is the position vector of particle B relative to A. It is given
r3 r2
that the force is conservative in nature and potential energy at infinity is zero. If B has to be removed from the
influence of A, energy has to be supplied for such a process. The ionization energy E0 is work that has to be
done by an external agent to move the particle from a distance r0 to infinity slowly. Here r0 is the equilibrium
position of the particle.
12. What is potential energy function of particle as function of r.
(A) α β (B) α + β (C) α − β (D) α β
− − − +
r2 r r2 r r2 r r2 r

Rankers Academy JEE

13. Find the ionization energy E0 of the particle B.
(A) β 2 (B) 2 β 2 (C) β 2 (D) β 2
2α α 4α α
14. r0 r0
If particle B is transfered slowly from point P1 (√ 2 r0 , √ 2 r0 ) to point P2 ( , ) in the xy-plane by an
√ 2 √ 2
external agent, calculate work required to be done by it in the process.
(A) 9 β 2 (B) β 2 (C) β 2 (D) None of these
64 α 16 α 64 α

E-4/8 (4) PHYSICS/ GR_Circular Motion, Work, Power & Energy

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-II : (Maximum Marks: 12)
Numerical-Answer-Type questions (Non Negative Integer) 3 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. A particle of mass 5 kg is free to slide on a smooth ring of radius r = 20 cm fixed in a vertical plane. The
particle is attached to one end of a spring whose other end is fixed to the top point O of the ring. Initially the
particle is at rest at a point A of the ring such that ∠ OCA = 60°, C being the centre of the ring. The natural
length of the spring is also equal to r = 20 cm. After the particle is released and slides down the ring the contact
force between the particle & the ring becomes zero when it reaches the lowest position B. Determine the force
constant of the spring.

2. A particle is moving in a circle of radius R in such a way that at any instant the normal and the tangential

Rankers Academy JEE

component of its acceleration are equal. If its speed at t = 0 is v0 then the time it takes to complete the first
revolution is R
α v0
(1 − e− β π ). Find the value of ( α + β ) 6.
3. A simple pendulum consists of a bob of mass m and a string of length R suspended from a peg P1 on the wall.
A second peg P2 is fixed vertically below the first one at a distance 3R/7 from it. The pendulum is drawn aside
such that the string is horizontal and released. The maximum height (with respect to the lowest point) to which
it rises is α R . Find α .
28

PHYSICS/ GR_Circular Motion, Work, Power & Energy (5) E-5/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-III : (Maximum Marks: 28)
Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 7 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. A small cubical block of mass 1 kg is placed inside a rough rectangular groove made in a circular rough table
as shown in the figure. Coefficient of friction for all the rough surfaces is μ = 0.5. The table starts rotating
clockwise with angular acceleration 1 rad/sec2 in a horizontal plane about its axis. Find the time (in sec) after
which the block will start motion with respect to table. Assume the size of block slightly smaller then the
width of groove.

2. A mass m = 1kg, which is free to move on a horizontal frictionless surface, is attached to one end of a massless
string that wraps partially around a frictionless vertical pole of radius r (see the top view in figure). You hold
on to the other end of the string. At t = 0, the mass has speed v0 in the tangential direction along the dotted
circle of radius R shown. Your task is to pull on the string so that the mass keeps moving along the circular

Rankers Academy JEE

path of radius R. If at any instant 't' force applied by hand on string is
2r
f0 = 2N then find out centripetal acceleration (in m/s2) of mass. (Given : R = )
√ 3

3. Two equal masses m are attached by a string. One mass lies at radial distance r from the center of a horizontal
turntable which rotates with constant angular velocity ω , while the second hangs from the strings inside the
turntable's hollow spindle (see figure). The coefficient of static friction between the turntable and the mass
lying on it is μ s = 0.5. The maximum and minimum values rmax, rmin of r such that the mass lying on the
turntable does not slide. Find the ratio of rmax / rmin ?

E-6/8 (6) PHYSICS/ GR_Circular Motion, Work, Power & Energy

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

4. There are three blocks of masses m1 = m, m2 = 4m and m3 = m. If two block system is kept over a smooth
hemisphere with two different arrangement one by one as shown in figure (i) & (ii) respectively are connected
with massless & inextensible string. In arrangement figure (i), after releasing the system from rest acceleration
5√3 2
of blocks is found to be ( a=
2
) m/s . In second arrangement block m & m
1 2 are kept symmetrically.

Find the acceleration of block (in m/s2) after releasing the system from rest according to figure (ii).

5. An old record player of 10 cm radius turns at 10 rad/s while mounted on a 30° incline as shown in the figure. A
particle of mass m can be placed any where on the rotating record. If the least possible coefficient of friction m
that must exist for no slipping to occur is μ , find 2 3 μ .
√

6. Rankers Academy JEE

A circular platform rotates around a vertical axis with angular velocity ω = 10 rad/s. On the platform is a ball
of mass 1 kg, attached to the long axis of the platform by a thin rod of length 10 cm ( α = 30°). Find normal
force exerted by the ball on the platform (in newton). Friction is absent.

7. A 2 kg block is gently pushed from rest at A and it slides down along the fixed smooth circular surface as
shown in figure. If the attached spring has a force constant k = 20 N/m. What is unstretched length of spring
(in m) so that it does not allow the block to leave the surface until angle with the vertical is θ = 60°.

PHYSICS/ GR_Circular Motion, Work, Power & Energy (7) E-7/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-IV : (Maximum Marks: 8)
Matrix Match Type (4 × 5) (One or more options correct) 1 Q. [8 M; (for each entry +2(0)]
1. Mark the matching options for situations shown in respective figures of column-I at the instant, when particle /
car is located on the x-axis as shown :

Column-I Column-II
Block attached to string is moving along a circle on rough surface

Force due to friction may

(A) (P)
have non-zero x-component

Block is placed on a disc rotating with non-uniform angular

velocity as shown below. There is no slipping between block &
disc. Force due to friction may
(B) (Q)
have non-zero y-component.

Rankers Academy JEE

Car moving on ground along a circular horizontal track at a
constant speed
Force due to friction may
(C) (R)
have non-zero z-component.

Car moving on ground at constant speed along a circular banked

track.
Force due to friction may be
(D) (S)
zero.

Centripetal force is only due

(T)
to friction.

E-8/8 (8) PHYSICS/ GR_Circular Motion, Work, Power & Energy

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
ANSWER KEY GR_Circular Motion, Work, Power & Energy
PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SECTION-I (i)
A. D A D C C B D
Q. 8 9 10 11
SECTION-I (ii)
A. A,B,C A,B,C A,C,D A,B,C

Q. 12 13 14
SECTION-I (iii)
A. B C B
Q. 1 2 3
SECTION-II
A. 500 729 27
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SECTION-III
A. 2 1 3 3 6 5 1
Q. 1
SECTION-IV
A. A->Q,B->PQT,C->PT,D->P

Rankers Academy JEE

(9)
KTJAPHELGR25002 HS-1/1
Rankers Academy JEE

(10)
Rankers Academy JEE

(11)
 GUIDED REVISION

SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:12)

Marks:12)
Single Correct Answer Type 4 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. Figure shows a square lamina with a disc of radius L removed from it which is now placed symmetrically
2
over upper right quarter. What is location of centre of mass of system relative to origin shown in figure.

(A) π L (i^ + j^) (B) π L (i^ + j^) (C) π L (i^ + j^) (D) π L (i^ + j^)
12 8 4 16
2. A fixed wedge ABC is in the shape of an equilateral triangle of side ℓ . Initially, a chain of length 2 ℓ and mass
m rests on the wedge inside of a tube as shown. The chain is pulled slightly, as a result it starts sliding out of
the tube. Work done by gravity till the time, the chain leaves the wedge will be :-

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) ( 3 + 1)mg ℓ (B) ( 3 + 2)mg ℓ (C) ( 3 + 2)mg ℓ (D) ( 3 + 4)mg ℓ
2 2 4 4

3. A man weighing 80 kg is standing at the centre of a flat boat and he is 20 m from the shore. He walks 8 m on the
boat towards the shore and then halts. The boat weight 200 kg. How far is he from the shore at the end of this time ?
(A) 11.2 m (B) 13.8 m (C) 14.3 m (D) 15.4 m
4. A monkey jumps from ball A onto ball B which are suspended from inextensible light strings each of length L.
The mass of each ball & monkey is same. What should be the minimum relative velocity of jump w.r.t. ball, if
both the balls manage to complete the circle?

(A) 5gL (B) 20gL (C) 4 5gL (D) none

(1)
 GUIDED REVISION

SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum

(Maximum Marks: 40)
40)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 10 Q. [4 M (–2)]
5. A man of mass m on an initially stationary boat gets off of the boat by leaping to the left in an exactly
horizontal direction. Immediately after the leap, the boat of mass M, is observed to be moving to the right at
speed v.
(A) Work done by man on boat is 1
(m) v2 .
2
(B) Increase in the mechanical energy of system of man and boat is 1 M2
+ M v2 .
2 m
(C) Velocity of centre of mass of system is v.
(D) Increase in kinetic energy of man is 1 M2 2
v
2 m
6. A man of mass M is carrying a ball of the mass M/2. The man is initially in the state of rest at a distance D
from fixed vertical wall. He throws the ball along the floor towards the wall with a velocity v with respect to
earth at t = 0. Because of throwing, the man also starts moving backwards. The ball rebounds elastically from
the wall. The man finally collects the ball. Assume friction is absent.

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) The velocity of the man + ball system after the man has collected the ball is 2v
3
(B) Net linear impulse by ball on man is Mv
3
(C) Total linear impulse by ball on man is Mv
6
(D) He collects the ball at t = 4D
v
7. In which of the following system (s) linear momentum cannot be conserved during collision along horizontal
line (parallel to base) ?
(A) (B)

(C) (D)

(2)
 GUIDED REVISION

8. Two blocks A and B of equal mass are connected by a light inextensible taut string passing over two light
smooth pulleys fixed to the blocks. The parts of the string not in contact with the pulleys are horizontal. A
horizontal force F is applied to the block A as shown. There is no friction, then

(A) the acceleration of A will be more that of B

(B) the acceleration of A will be less than that of B
(C) the sum of rate of changes of momentum of A and B is greater than the magnitude of F.
(D) the sum of rate of changes of momentum of A and B is equal to the magnitude of F.
9. Two smooth balls A and B, each of mass m and radius R, have their centres at (0, 0, R) and at (5R, – R, R)
respectively, in a coordinate system as shown. Ball A, moving along positive x axis, collides with ball B. Just
before the collision, speed of ball A is 4 m/s and ball B is stationary. The collision between the balls is elastic.

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) Velocity of the ball A just after the collision is (i^ +
(B) Velocity of B just after collision is zero.
^
3j ) m/s

(C) Impulse of the force exerted by A on B during the collision, is equal to (3mi^ − ^
3mj ) kg-m/s

(D) Impulse of the force exerted by A on B is ^

4mi kg-m/s.
10. In the figure shown, a ball is released from the smooth track. If the ball strikes the horizontal surface of the
track and bounces off, it again strikes the horizontal surface at some distance R from B and rises to a height
maximum of h' above the surface (If the coefficient of restitution for the collision is e) :-

(A) R is maximum for e = 1

3
(B) R is maximum for e = 1
(C) h ′ 3h
for all values of e
4
(D) h' = h for e = 1

(3)
 GUIDED REVISION

11. A particle is thrown from a height h horizontally towards a smooth vertical wall moving away with a speed n
as shown in the figure. If the particle returns to the point of projection after suffering two elastic collisions, one
with the wall and another with the ground, then the total time of flight is T and initial separation between the
particle and the wall is x. Then :-

(A) 2h (B) h (C) h (D) 2h

T=2 T=2 x=ν x=ν
g 2g 2g g
12. A small body of mass m is at rest inside a thin, narrow tyre of mass m and radius r which is lying on a
horizontal table with its plane horizontal. At t = 0 it is given tangential velocity v0 as shown. After time T
velocity of tyre become zero, then :- (Neglect friction everywhere)

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) 2πr (B) 3πr
T= T=
v0 v0
(C) T 3v0 (D) at t = T
speed of ball is v0
.
at t = speed of ball is . 6 2
6 2
13. A 24 kg projectile is fired at an angle of 53° above the horizontal with an initial speed of 50 m/s. At the highest
point in its trajectory, the projectile explodes into two fragments of equal mass, the first of which falls
vertically with zero initial speed. (Assume the ground is level.)
(ii) How much ?
(A) The second fragment strike the ground from the point of firing is 360 m.
(B) Energy was released during the explosion 10800 J.
(C) The second fragment strike the ground from the point of firing is 240 m.
(D) Energy was released during the explosion 21600 J.

(4)
 GUIDED REVISION

14. A rocket ascends from rest in a uniform gravitational field g by ejecting exhaust with a uniform relative speed
dm
u. Assume that the rate at which mass is expelled is given by = km where m is the instantaneous mass of
dt
the rocket & k is a constant & that the rocket is retarded by air resistance with a force mbv where b is a
constant & v is instantaneous velocity of rocket.
(A) its velocity after a long time will be (ku – g)/b.
(B) its velocity after a long time will be ku/b.
(C) The acceleration of rocket as a function of time is (ku – g)e –bt.
(D) The velocity of rocket as a function of time is [{(ku – g)/b}(1 – e – bt)].
SECTION-I (iii) : (Maximum
(Maximum Marks: 9)
9)
Linked
ed Comprehension Type (Single Option Correct) 1 Para × 3 Q.
Q [3 M (–1)]
(–

A small block of mass M moves on a frictionless surface of an inclined plane, as shown in figure. The angle
of the incline suddenly changes from 60° to 30° at point B. The block is initially at rest at A. Assume that
collisions between the block and the incline are totally inelastic (g = 10 m/s2)

Rankers Academy JEE

15. The speed of the block at point B immediately after it strikes the second incline is :
(A) 60 m/s (B) 45 m/s (C) 30 m/s (D) 15 m/s

16. The speed of the block at point C, immediately before it leaves the second incline is :
(A) 120 m/s (B) 105 m/s (C) 90 m/s (D) 75 m/s

17. If collision between the block and the incline is completely elastic, then the vertical (upward) component of the
velocity of the block at point B, immediately after it strikes the second incline is :
(A) 30 m/s (B) 15 m/s (C) 0 (D) − 15 m/s

(5)
 GUIDED REVISION

SECTION-II : (Maximum
(Maximum Marks: 20)
20)
Numerical
rical Answer type Questions (Upto Second Decimal Place) 5 Q. [4 M (0)]
(0
1. In a circus act, a 4kg dog is trained to jump from B cart to A and then immediately back to the B cart. The carts
each have a mass of 20kg and they are initially at rest. In both cases the dog jumps at 6m/s relative to the cart.
If the cart moves along the same line with negligible friction, the final velocity of cart A is vA and cart B is
vB with respect to the floor. Then find the vA : vB.

2. A rocket is projected straight up and explodes into three equally massive fragments just as it reaches the top of
its flight (refer figure). One of the fragments is observed to come straight down in 2 sec, while the other two
take 4 sec to come to ground, after the burst. Find the height h (in m) at which the fragmentation occurred.

3.
Rankers Academy JEE
A square plank of mass m1 = 100 kg and edge length L = 20 2 m is placed on a smooth surface. Two person
each of mass m2 = m3 = 50 kg are at corner of a plank as shown in figure. Two person begin to walk on the
plank along two different paths as shown in figure and reach nearest corners. What is magnitude of
displacement of plank (in m) in the process.

4. Two bodies of same mass tied with an inelastic string of length ℓ = 5m lie together. One of them is projected
vertically upwards with velocity 6g ℓ . Find the maximum height (in m) up to which the centre of mass of
system of the two masses rises. (Initially string is loose)
5. Two identical balls of mass M and radius R are placed in contact with each other on a frictionless horizontal
surface as shown. The third ball of mass M and radius R/2 moves vertically downward and hits the two balls
symmetrically with speed 5 m/s and comes to rest. Find the speed of any one of the bigger balls after
collision if bigger balls are moving horizontally after collision.

(6)
 GUIDED REVISION

SECTION-IV : (Maximum
(Maximum Marks: 24)
24)
Matrix
atrix Match Type (4 × 5) (One or more options correct) 3 Q. [8 M; (for each entry +2(0
+2(0)]
+
1. Column I describes the system and initial motion of its particles and column II gives characteristics associated
with subsequent motion.
Column-II Column-II
Two identical particles under influence of mutual gravitational
force only. Particles are given initial velocity perpendicular to
line joining as shown.
Centre of mass of system
(A) (P)
does not accelerate.

Two identical balls on a smooth table. Elastic head on collision

takes place.
In centre of mass
(B) (Q) frame momentum of system is

Rankers Academy JEE

zero.

Two identical balls on a smooth table. Oblique elastic collision

takes place.

Momentum of system is
(C) (R)
conserved.

Block is released on a wedge as shown in figure. All the surfaces

are smooth. Mechanical energy of system
(D) (S)
is conserved

Total kinetic energy is

(T)
constant

(7)
 GUIDED REVISION

2. Match the column:

In all cases in column – I, the blocks/plank/trolley are placed on the smooth horizontal surface.

Column – I Column – I
The initial velocities given to the blocks when spring is
relaxed are as shown Centre of mass of the complete
(A) (P) system shown will not move
horizontally

A constant force is applied on 2 kg block. Springs are

initially relaxed
(B) (Q) Centre of mass of the complete
system shown will move horizontally

Initially system is at rest. Man starts moving on a large plank

with constant velocity.
Mechanical energy of the system will
(C) (R) be conserved

A man standing on one of the trolleys (initially at rest) jumps

Rankers Academy JEE

to the other with relative velocity of 4 m/s horizontally
(D) (S) Mechanical energy of the system
will increase

(T) Linear momentum of the complete

system will always remain constant
3. Two blocks of masses 3 kg and 6 kg are connected by an ideal spring and are placed on a frictionless
horizontal surface. The 3 kg block is imparted a speed of 2 m/s towards left. (Initially spring is relaxed)

Column-I Column-II
2 2
(A) When the speed of 3 kg block is m/s (P) Velocity of centre of mass is m/s
3 3
2
(B) When the speed of 6 kg block is m/s है तो (Q) Deformation of the spring is zero.
3
(C) When the speed of 3 kg block is maximum (R) Deformation of the spring is maximum
(D) When the speed of 6 kg block is minimum (S) Both the blocks are at rest with respect to each other.
(T) Both the blocks are at rest with respect to ground

(8)
 GUIDED REVISION

PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4
SECTION-I (i)
A. B D C C
SECTION-I Q. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
(ii) A. B,D A,D B,C,D A,CA,CB,CA,CA,CA,BA,C,D
SECTION-I Q. 15 16 17
(iii) A. B B C
Q. 1 2 3 4 5
SECTION-II
A. 1.2 50 10 5 1
Q. 1 2 3
SECTION-IV A->PQRS,B->PQRS,C->PQRS,D- A->PRT,B->QS,C->PST,D- A->PQRS,B->PRS,C->PQ,D-
A.
>QS >PST >PQ

Rankers Academy JEE

(9)
Rankers Academy JEE

(10)
Rankers Academy JEE

(11)
 GUIDED REVISION

SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:21)

Marks:21)
Single Correct Answer Type 7 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. A semicircular lamina of mass m has radius r and centre C. Its moment of inertia about an axis through its
centre of mass and perpendicular to its plane is –

(A) 1 2 (B) 1 4 (C) 1 8 (D) 1 16

mr − mr2 − mr2 − mr2
2 2 π2 2 9π 2 2 9π 2
2. A uniform thin stick of length ℓ and mass m is held horizontally with its end B hinged at a point B on the edge
of a table. Point A is suddenly released. The acceleration of the centre of mass of the stick at the time of
release, is :-

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) 3
4
g (B) 3
7
g (C) 2
7
g (D) 1
7
g
3. An uniform hemi-solid sphere is placed with flat surface on rough inclined plane as shown in figure. If friction
is large for no sliding, then the minimum angle θ at which toppling occur is

(A) 1 (C) 8 (D) 4

tan−1 (B) 45° tan−1 tan−1
2 3 3
4. A ring of radius R is rolling purely on the outer surface of a pipe of radius 4R. At some instant, the center of
the ring has a constant speed = v. Then , the acceleration of the point on the ring which is in contact with the
surface of the pipe is :
(A) 4v2/5R (B) 3v2/5R (C) v2/4R (D) zero

(1)
 GUIDED REVISION

5. A T shaped object with dimensions shown in the figure is lying on a smooth floor. A force F is applied at the
point P parallel to AB such that the object has only the translational motion without rotation. Find the location
of P with respect to C.

(A) (3/4)l (B) l (C) (4/3)l (D) (3/2)l

6. As shown in the figure rod of mass m and length ℓ is hinged at O at one end and free to rotate in vertical
plane. A force F of magnitude mg is applied on another end of rod which always act perpendicular to the rod.
Force is start acting at time t = 0 (as shown). Find vertical component of normal reaction acting on rod when
rod become horizontal for 3rd time:- (given m = 2 kg, ℓ = 1m, g = 10 m/s2)

7.
Rankers Academy JEE
(A) 5 N (B) 10 N (C) 15 N (D) 20 N
A conical pendulum consists of a mass M suspended from a string of length ℓ . The mass executes a circle of
radius R in a horizontal plane with speed v. At time t, the mass is at position R ^i and has velocity v ^j . At time t,
the angular momentum vector of the mass M about the point from which the string suspended is :

(A) ^ (B) ^
MvR k Mvl k

(C) l 2 − R2 ^ R ^ (D) l 2 − R2 ^ R ^
Mvl i+ k − Mvl i+ k
l l l l

(2)
 GUIDED REVISION

SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum

(Maximum Marks: 24)
24)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 6 Q. [4 M (–2)]
8. A light rigid rod AB of length 3 ℓ has a point mass m at end A and a point mass 2m at end B is kept on a
smooth horizontal surface. Point C is the center of mass of the system. Initially the system is at rest. The mass
2m is suddenly given a velocity v0 towards right. Take Z axis to be perpendicular to the plane of the paper.

(A) The minimum moment of inertia (about Z-axis), Izz of the system is 5m ℓ 2.
(B) 2mv20

Rankers Academy JEE

The magnitude of tension in the rod in subsequent motion is
9ℓ
(C) A
The ratio of moment of inertia about Z-axis at points A and B, IzzB =2
Izz
(D) Point C remains stationary during subsequent motion.
9. A man of mass 85 kg stands on one end of a uniform board of length 2 m and mass 15 kg. The other end is tied
to the floor by a steel cable, and the board is supported from below just 0.5 m from the cable end (see figure).

(A) The tension in cable is 1000 N

(B) The tension in cable is 2700 N
(C) The normal reaction at support is 3700 N
(D) The normal reaction at support is 1700 N

(3)
 GUIDED REVISION

10. A uniform rod AB of length 7m is undergoing combined rotational and translational motion on smooth
horizontal surface such that, at some instant of time, velocities of its end point A and centre C are both
perpendicular to the rod and opposite in direction, having magnitude 11 m/s and 3 m/s respectively as shown in
the fig. Now consider that no external force and torque is acting on the rod. Then select correct options.

(A) acceleration of point A is 56 m/s2

(B) acceleration of point B is 56 m/s2
(C) at the instant shown in the figure acceleration of point C is zero.
(D) angular velocity of the rod is 4 rad/s

Rankers Academy JEE

11. A ball moves over a fixed track as shown in the figure. From A to B the ball rolls without slipping. Surface BC
is frictionless. KA, KB and KC are kinetic energies of the ball at A, B and C, respectively. Then

(A) hA > hC ; KB > KC (B) hA > hC ; KC > KA

(C) hA = hC ; KB = KC (D) hA < hC ; KB > KC
12. A uniform solid cylinder of mass m and radius R is released from rest on a sufficiently rough inclined plane.
During its downward journey along the incline, the cylinder moves distance ℓ along the incline. The angle of
inclination from horizontal is a. Mark correct statements :-
(A) The acceleration of centre of mass of cylinder is 2g sin α
.
3
(B) 4 g ℓ sin α
The final angular speed of cylinder is .
3 R2
(C) The minimum coefficient of friction required so that there is no slipping is tan α
.
3
(D) If released from rest cylinder will undergo pure rolling even on smooth inclined plane.

(4)
 GUIDED REVISION

13. Suppose a solid disk having radius R is put on a rough horizontal surface and given an angular speed ω 0 about
an axis through it's centre and released. If coefficient of friction between disc and surface is μ then:
(A) Time interval before rolling motion starts is R ω 0 .
3μg
(B) R2 ω 20
Distance travelled by disc before pure rolling starts is .
18 μ g
(C) Rolling motion doesn't occur
(D) Time interval before rolling motion starts is 2R ω 0
.
3μg
SECTION-I (iii) : (Maximum
(Maximum Marks: 39)
39)
Linked
ed Comprehension Type (Single Option Correct) (3 Para × 3 Q.) (2 Para × 2 Q.)
Q [3 M (–1
(–1)]

A cardboard strip, bent in the shape of the letter C, is put on a rough inclined plane, as shown in the figure.

Rankers Academy JEE

14. At what angle of inclination to the horizontal plane will it topple? (assume that it does not slide).
(A) 2 (B) 3 (D) 1
tan−1 tan−1 (C) 45° tan−1
3 2 3
15. What should be the coefficient of friction so that it does not slide before toppling.
(A) 0.66 (B) 0.75 (C) 1.0 (D) 0.33
16. What should be the time taken to travel a distance a if the inclined plane is made completely smooth? [Take
angle of inclined plane as α ]
(A) a (B) 2a (C) 2a (D) None of these
g sin α g sin α 3g sin α

(5)
 GUIDED REVISION

A solid cylinder of mass m and radius R is kept at rest on a plank of mass 2m lying on a smooth horizontal
surface. Massless and inextensible string connecting cylinder to the plank is passing over a massless pulley.
The friction between the cylinder and the plank is sufficient to prevent slipping. Pulley A is pulled with a
constant horizontal force F.

17. Acceleration of cylinder with respect to earth is

(A) 5F (B) F (C) 3F (D) 2F
21m 7m 7m 7m
18. Acceleration of plank with respect to earth is
(A) 5F (B) F (C) 3F (D) 2F
21m 7m 7m 7m
19. Magnitude of friction force acting on the plank is
(A) F (B) F (C) F (D) 2F
7 14 21 7

Rankers Academy JEE

A smooth disc of mass M and radius R can rotate freely around a vertical axis supported by frictionless
bearings. A constraining vertical surface of negligible mass, whose shape is a semicircular arc of radius r =
R
, is fixed on the disc as shown in the figure. A small ball of mass m is placed on the stationary disc and is
2
bowled at a speed v in such a way that it reaches the internal side of the constraining surface tangentially.

20. Mark the correct statement :-

(A) Momentum of ball & disc system is conserved
(B) Mechanical energy of ball & disc system is not conserved
(C) Angular momentum of ball & disc system is conserved
(D) Mechanical energy of ball & disc system is not conserved due to impulsive reaction from
support bearings

(6)
 GUIDED REVISION

21. What is speed of the ball when it leaves the disc :-

(A) M (B) v
m (C) 2M (D) M
v v 2v
M + 2m M + 2m M +m 2M + m
22. What is angular velocity of disc when ball leaves it :-
(A) mv M (B) 2
mv m (C) mv 2M (D) mv M
2 2 2
MR M + 2m MR M + 2m MR M +m MR 2M + m

A disk of radius 2R and mass 'M' is hinged from its center. If a disk of radius R been removed such that radius
of bigger disk behave as a diameter of the disk and it is welded on the opposite side as shown in diagram.

23. Find the ratio of moment of inertia about point 'O' in Case-I and Case-II :-
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 1
(D) 1
2 1 2
24. Find the angular acceleration of the system in case-II if the system is released from the given position about

Rankers Academy JEE

the axis passing through O and perpendicular to the plane of disc:-
(A) g
R
(B) g
2R
(C) g
3R
(D) g
4R

A 20 kg cabinet is mounted on small casters that allow it to move freely ( μ = 0) on the floor. If a 100 N force
is applied as shown.

25. The acceleration (in m/s2) of the cabinet is :-

(A) 5 (B) 0 (C) > 5 (D) < 5
26. The range of values of h for which the cabinet will not tip is :-
(A) It will topple for all values of h. (B) 0.3 m < h < 1.5 m
(C) h > 0.3 m (D) h < 1.5 m

(7)
 GUIDED REVISION

SECTION-II : (Maximum
(Maximum Marks: 8)
8)
Numerical
rical Answer type Questions (Upto Second Decimal Place) 2 Q. [4 M (0)]
(0
1. There is a rectangular plate of mass M kg of dimensions (a × b). The plate is held in horizontal position by
striking n small balls each of mass m per unit area per unit time. These are striking in the shaded half region of
the plate. The balls are colliding elastically with velocity v. What is v? It is given n = 100, M = 3 kg, m = 0.01
kg; b = 2 m; a = 1m; g = 10 m/s2.

2. I0 is the moment of inertia of a rod about an axis through its centre of mass and perpendicular to the length
whose linear density varies as λ = ax where a is a constant and x is the position of an element of the rod
aℓ4
relative to its left end. The length of the rod is ℓ . If I0 = I0 = . Find the value of P.
P
SECTION-III : (Maximum
(Maximum Marks: 20)
20)
Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 5 Q. [4 M (0)]

Rankers Academy JEE

1. A uniform semicircular disc of mass ‘M’ and radius ‘R’ hinged at point O a shown in figure is released from
rest from a vertical position as shown. If the initial magnitude of angular acceleration of the disc is xg than
3πR
4R
the value of x is (Center of mass is at a distance from center of disc):
3π

2. A uniform solid sphere rolls down on a vertical rigid surface without slipping.
The vertical surface moves with an acceleration a = g/2 in horizontal direction as shown. The minimum
coefficient of friction between the sphere and vertical surface so as to prevent slipping is m. Write 14 m as
answer.

(8)
 GUIDED REVISION

3. A uniform stick of mass 18 kg and length 3 m spins around on a frictionless horizontal plane, with its Centre
of Mass stationary. A mass M is placed on the plane, and the stick collides elastically with it, as shown (with
the contact point being the end of the stick). What should M (in kg) be so that after the collision the stick has
translational motion, but no rotational motion?

4. ^
A bullet of mass m moving with velocity ν 0(−k) strikes the bottom of a stationary vertical uniform ring of
same mass m and radius R = 1 m. The ring lies in XY plane with its topmost point hinged on the ceiling. The
ring can rotate about X-axis. There is no friction between the hinge and the ring. The bullet gets embedded in
the ring immidiately after collision. Find the angular velocity of the system (in radian /s) just after collision.
[Take ν 0 = 11 m/s]

Rankers Academy JEE

(9)
 GUIDED REVISION

5. A spool, initially at rest, is kept on a frictionless incline making an angle θ = 37° with the horizontal. The mass
of the spool is 2kg and it is pulled by a string as shown with a force of T = 10N. The string connecting the
spool and the pulley is initially horizontal. Find the initial acceleration of the spool on the incline. Express your
answer in m/s2.

SECTION-IV : (Maximum
(Maximum Marks: 8)
8)
Matrix
atrix Match Type (4 × 5) (One or more options correct) 1 Q. [8 M; (for each entry +2(0
+2(0)]
+
1. Column-I Column-II

(A) (P) 8MR2

11

Rankers Academy JEE

(B) (Q) MR2
12

(C) (R) 13MR2

8

(D) (S) MR2

8

(10)
 GUIDED REVISION

PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SECTION-I (i)
A. D A C A C C C
Q. 8 9 10 11 12 13
SECTION-I (ii)
A. B,C B,C A,B,C,D A,B A,B,C A,B
Q. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
A. A A B C D B C A A D
SECTION-I (iii)
Q. 24 25 26
A. D A B
Q. 1 2
SECTION-II
A. 10 36.00
Q. 1 2 3 4 5
SECTION-III
A. 8 8 9 4 2
Q. 1
SECTION-IV
A. A->Q,B->P,C->S,D->R

Rankers Academy JEE

(11)
 GUIDED REVISION

SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:36)

Marks:36)
Single Correct Answer Typeɟ ɟ ɟ 12 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. Two lines AC and BC are drawn on a circular disc as shown in figure. The disc is made of a material with linear
expansion coefficients α x > α y. Here α x and α y are linear expansion coefficient for expansion in x-direction and
y-direction respectively. C is the centre of disc. If the disc is heated uniformly. Angle ACB (= θ ) will :-

(A) increase
(B) decrease

2.
Rankers Academy JEE
(C) remains constant
(D) may increase or decreases depending on value of temperature increment
A rod of mass M, area of cross section A and length ℓ 0 is connected with a spring as shown in figure. If
coefficient of linear expansion of rod is α and initially no extension was there in the spring of spring constant
k, then the stress developed in rod when its temperature is increased by Δ T, is
[Young's Modulus of material of the rod is Y]

(A) k [Y α Δ T ] ℓ 0 (C) kℓo + Y A (D) kℓo + Y

(B) Y α ΔT Y α ΔT Y α ΔT
[k ℓ o + Y A] kℓo kℓo
3. A wire of cross-section A is stretched horizontally between two clamps located 2lɟmeters apart. A weight W kg
is suspended from the mid point of the wire. If the mid point sags vertically through a distance x << l the strain
produced is :-
(A) 2x2 (B) x2 (C) x2
2 2 2 (D) none of these
l l 2l

(1)
 GUIDED REVISION

4. In an industrial process 10 kg of water per hour is to be heated from 20°C to 80°C . To do this steam at 150°C
is passed from a boiler into a copper coil immersed in water. The steam condenses in the coil and is returned to
the boiler as water at 90°C. How many kg of steam is required per hour.
(Specific heat of steam = 1 cal/g°C, Latent heat of vaporisation = 540 cal/g)
(A) 1 g (B) 1 kg (C) 10 g (D) 10 kg
5. Two large black plane surfaces are maintained at constant temperature T1 and T2(T1 > T2). Two thin black
plates are placed between the two surfaces and in parallel to these. After some time, steady conditions are
obtained. What is the ratio of heat transfer rate between plate-1 & plate-3 to the ratio of original (when plate-3
& plate-4 was not present) heat tranfer rate between plate-1 & plate-2 ( η ) in steady state?

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) η = 1 (B) η = 1 (C) η =ɟ1 (D) η =ɟ0
2 3
6. A long, thin metal bar of length ℓ ɟis clamped rigidly at its ends at temperature t0. When the temperature is
increased to t, the expanding bar will bow out, as shown below. If the bowing is not too large, a fair first
approximation to the shape of the bar is two equal straight segments in the form of a wide V. What is the arch
δ of the bow as a function of t? (This is the distance between the corner of the V and the straight line that

represents the form of the bar at t0.)

(A) δ = ( ℓ /2) 2 α (t − t0 ) (B) δ = ( ℓ ) α (t − t0 )

(C) δ = ( ℓ /2) α (t − t0 ) (D) δ = ( ℓ ) 2 α (t − t0 )

(2)
 GUIDED REVISION

7. Rod of constant cross-section moves towards right ɟwith constant acceleration. Graph of stress and distance
from left end is given as in figure. If density of material of rod at cross section 1 is 9 gm/cm3. Find density at
cross section 2.ɟ

(A) 16 gm/cm3 (B) 20 gm/cm3 (C) 24 gm/cm3 (D) 12 gm/cm3

8. ‘Gulab Jamuns’ (assumed to be spherical) are to be heated in an oven. They are available in two sizes, one
twice bigger (in radius) than the other. Pizzas (assumed to be discs) are also to be heated in oven. They are also
in two sizes, one twice big (in radius) than the other. All four are put together to be heated to oven temperature.
Choose the correct option from the following:
(A) Both size gulab jamuns will get heated in the same time.

Rankers Academy JEE

(B) Smaller gulab jamuns are heated before bigger ones.
(C) Smaller pizzas are heated before bigger ones.
(D) Bigger pizzas are heated before smaller ones.
9. Three very large plates of same area are kept parallel and close to each other. They are considered as ideal
black surfaces and have very high thermal conductivity. The first and third plates are maintained at
temperatures 2T and 3T respectively. The temperature of the middle (i.e. second) plate under steady state
condition is
(A) 1/4 (B) 1/4 (C) 1/4
65 97 97
T T T (D) (97)1/4 T
2 4 2
10. There is formation of layer of ice x cm thick on water, when the temperature of air is – θ °C (less than freezing
point). The thickness of layer increases from x to y in the time t, then the value of t is given by-
(A) (x + y)(x − y) ρ L (B) (x − y) ρ L
2K θ 2K θ
(C) (x + y)(x − y) ρ L (D) (x − y) ρ LK
Kθ 2θ

(3)
 GUIDED REVISION

11. Two thin walled spheres of different materials, one with double the radius and one-fourth wall thickness of the

other, are filled with ice. If the time taken for complete melting of ice in the sphere of larger radius is 25
minutes and that for smaller one is 16 minutes, the ratio of thermal conductivities of the materials of larger
sphere to the smaller sphere is
(A) 4 : 5 (B) 25 : 1 (C) 1 : 25 (D) 8 : 25
12. A rod ɟof mass m, uniform cross sectional area A and length L is accelerated by applying force F as shown in

figure on a smooth surface. If Young’s modulus of elasticity of the material of rod is Y. (Consider x as
measured from the right end)

(A) Tension in rod as a function of distance x is Fx

. ɟɟ

Rankers Academy JEE

2L
(B) Strain in rod is F
.
2AY
(C) Elastic potential energy stored in the rod is F 2L
.
8AY
(D) There is no stress in rod.
SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum
(Maximum Marks: 32)
32)
Multiple Correct Answer Typeɟ ɟ8 Q. [4 M (–2)]
13. A metal cylinder of very high conductivity and mass 0.5 kg is heated electrically by a 12 W heater in a room at

15°C. The cylinder temperature rises to 25ºC in 5 min and finally becomes constant at 45°C. Assuming that the
rate of heat loss is proportional to the excess temperature over the surroundings
(A) The rate of loss of heat of the cylinder to surrounding at 20°C is 2 W
(B) The rate of loss of heat of the cylinder to surrounding at 45°C is 2 W
(C) Specific heat capacity of metal is 240
ɟJ/kg°C
ℓ n(3/2)
(D) None of these

(4)
 GUIDED REVISION

14. A 100 cm long cylindrical flask with inner and outer diameter 2 cm and 4 cm respectively is completely filled
with ice as shown in the figure. The constant temperature outside the flask is 40ºC. (Thermal conductivity of
the flask is 0.693 W/m °C, Lice = 80 cal/gm & ℓ n2 = 0.693).

(A) Rate of heat flow from outside to the flask is 80 π J/s.

(B) The rate at which ice melts isɟ π kg/s
4200
(C) The rate at which ice melts is 100 π kg/s
(D) Rate of heat flow from outside to flask is 40 π J/s
15. Which of the following statements are true?
(A) Hole in the wall of a cavity radiator behaves like a black body.

Rankers Academy JEE

(B) Hole in the wall of a cavity radiator does not act like a black body.
(C) When a body is kept in a surrounding of low temperature it does not absorb any energy from the
ɟsurroundings.
(D) When a body is kept in surrounding of low temperature it simultaneously radiates heat to the
ɟsurroundings and absorbs heat from the surroundings.
16. A sample A of liquid water and a sample B of ice of identical mass are kept in two neighbouring chambers in
an otherwise insulated container. The chambers can exchange heat with each other. The graph of temperatures
Swater
of the two chambers is plotted with timeɟSice = ɟ:-
2

(A) Finally the contents in sample A is water.

(B) Equilibrium temperature is freezing point of water
(C) Ice melts partly
(D) Finally the contents in sample B is ice only.

(5)
 GUIDED REVISION

17. 50 gm ice at – 10°C is mixed with 10gm steam at 100°C. When the mixture finally reaches its steady state
inside a calorimeter of water equivalent 1.5 gm then : [Assume calorimeter was initially at 0°C, Take latent
heat of vaporization of water = 540 cal/gm, Latent heat of fusion of water = 80 cal/gm and specific heat
capacity of water = 1 cal/gm-°C, specific heat of ice = 0.5 cal/gm°C]
(A) Mass of water remaining is 60 gm (B) Mass of ice remaining is 3 gm
(C) Mass of steam remaining is 1.20 gm (D) Final temperature is between 0°C and 100°C
18. The temperature of earth is maintained by a dynamic equilibrium between Sun and Earth. Sun & Earth can be
assumed to be black bodies :
(A) If the power output of sun would double with changing the temperature, equilibrium temperature of
earth also doubles.
(B) If the radius of sun doubles without changing its' power, its surface temperature would decrease by
factor of 2.
(C) If the radius of earth doubles without any change in sun, it's equilibrium temperature would increase
by factor ofɟ 2.
(D) If the distance between earth and sun would decrease by a factor of 2, the equilibrium temperature
of earth would increase by factor of 2.

Rankers Academy JEE

19. There are two spheres of same radius and material at same temperature but one being solid while the other
hollow. Then :-
(A) They are heated to the same temperature solid sphere will expand more than hollow sphere.
(B) They are heated to the same temperature both sphere will expand equally.
(C) If same amount of heat is given to them then solid sphere will expand more then hollow sphere.
(D) If same amount of heat is given to them then hollow sphere will expand more then solid sphere.
20. A thin uniform metallic rod of length 0.5 m and radius 0.1 m rotates with an angular velocityɟ400 rad/s in a

horizontal plane about a vertical axis passing through one of its ends.ɟThe density of material of the rod is 104
kg/m3 and the Young's modulus is 2 × 1011 N/m2.
(A) The elongation of the rod isɟ 1 × 10−3 m.
3
(B) The elongation of the rod is non-uniform along its length.
(C) Tension at the center of the rod isɟ 3 π × 106 N .
2
(D) Tension at the center of the rod isɟ 2 π × 106 N .
2

(6)
 GUIDED REVISION

SECTION-I (iii) : (Maximum

(Maximum Marks: 9)
9)
Linked
ed Comprehension Typeɟ(Single
(Single Option Correct) 1 Para × 3 Q.
Q [3 M (–1)]
(–

Multi-layer insulation, or MLI, is thermal insulation composed of multiple layers of thin sheets often used on
spacecraft. It is one of the main items of the spacecraft thermal design, primarily intended to reduce heat loss by
thermal radiation. In its basic form, it does not appreciably insulate against other thermal losses such as heat
conduction or convection. It is therefore commonly used on satellites and other applications in vacuum where
conduction and convection are much less significant and radiation dominates. MLI gives many satellites and
other space probes the appearance of being covered with gold foil.
The principle behind MLI is radiation balance. To see why it works, start with a concrete example - imagine a
square meter of a surface in outer space, at 300 K, with an emissivity of 1, facing away from the sun or other
heat sources. From the Stefan-Boltzmann law, this surface will radiate 460 watts. Now imagine we place a thin
(but opaque) layer 1 cm away from the plate, thermally insulated from it, and also with an emissivity of 1. This
new layer will cool until it is radiating 230 watts from each side, at which point everything is in balance. The
new layer receives 460 watts from the original plate. 230watts is radiated back to the original plate, and 230
watts to space. The original surface still radiates 460 watts, but gets 230 back from the new layers, for a net loss
of 230 watts. So overall, the radiation losses have been reduced by half by adding the additional layer.
More layers can be added to reduce the loss further. The blanket can be further improved by making the outside

Rankers Academy JEE

surfaces highly reflective to thermal radiation, which reduces both absorption and emission. The performance
of a layer stack can be quantified in terms of its overall heat transfer coefficient U, which defines the radiative
heat flow rate Q between two parallel surfaces with a temperature difference ɟ Δ T and area A as
Q = UA Δ T
Theoretically, the heat transfer coefficient between two layers with emissivities ɟ ∈ 1 ɟand ∈ 2 , under vacuum, is
1
U = 4σT 3 ,
1 1
∈1 + ∈2 − 1
where T is the mean of the temperatures (in K) of the two layers and σ = 5.7 × 10−8 ɟWm –2K –4 is theɟ
Stefan-Boltzmann Constant. If each layer has the same emissivity ɟÎ on both sides, then a stack of N layers
placed between two high-emissivity surfaces will have an overall heat transfer coefficient
1
U = 4σT 3
N ∈2 − 1 + 1
Clearly, increasing the number of layers and decreasing the emissivity, lower the heat transfer coefficient,
which is equivalent to a higher insulation value. In this equation, it is assumed that the temperature difference is
small compared to the absolute temperature.ɟ
21. Main purpose of multilayer insulation is insulation against heat transfer, where heat transfer is mainly due to :-
(A) Conduction (B) Conduction & radiation
(C) Conduction & convection (D) Radiation

(7)
 GUIDED REVISION

22. In space there is MLI consisting of 50 layers. Each layer has emissivity ( ∈ = 0.2) both ɟsides & outer ɟmost
temperature is 550 K and inner most temperature is 100 K less than outer most then find over all heat transfer
coefficient (in Wm –2k –1) :-
(A) 6.33 (B) 6.33 × 10−2 (C) 12.66 × 10 –3 (D) 6.33 × 10 –3
23. For a particular plate heat transfer due to conduction and radiation are equal. Width of a plate is 2mm, mean
1
temperature is 1000 K and emissivity of inner and outer surface are 1 & ɟ respectively. Then find
2
conductivity of plate material (in SI) :-
(A) 0.228 (B) 11
(C) 1.11 (D) Data is insufficient
SECTION-II : (Maximum
(Maximum Marks: 16)
16)
Numerical-Answer-Type
erical-Answer-Type
rical-Answer-Type questionsɟ(Non Negative
Negati Integer) 4 Q. [4 M (0)]
(0
1. A liquid of volumetric thermal expansion coefficient 200 × 10 –6 /°C and bulk modulus = 1.2 × 109 Pa is filled
in a spherical tank of negligible heat expansion coefficient. Its radius is 25 cm and wall thickness is 2 mm.
When the temperature of the liquid is raised by 20 °C, find the tensile stress developed (in MPa) in the wall of
the tank?

Rankers Academy JEE

2. A rod of negligible heat capacity has length 40 cm, area of cross-section 1.0 cm2 and thermal conductivity 100
W/m °C. The temperature of one end is maintained at 0°C and that of the other end is slowly and linearly
varied from 0ºC to 60°C in 10 minutes. Assuming no loss of heat through the sides, find the total heat
transmitted through the rod in these 10 minutes (in J).
3. A cylindrical block of length 0.4 m an area of cross-section 0.04m2 is placed coaxially on a thin metal disc of
mass 0.4 kg and of the same cross-section. The upper face of the cylinder is maintained at a constant
temperature of 400K and the initial temperature of the disc is 300K. If the thermal conductivity of the material
of the cylinder is 10 watt/m-K and the specific heat of the material of the disc inɟ
600 J/kg-K, how long will it take for the temperature of the disc to increase to 350K? Assume, for purposes of
calculation, the thermal conductivity of the disc to be very high and the system to be thermally insulated except
for the upper face of the cylinder.
4. An electric heater is used in a room of total wall area 50m2 to maintain a constant temperature of 15°C inside
when the outside temperature is – 10°C. The walls have two different layers. The inner layer is of cement of
thickness 2 cm, while the outer layer is of brick of thickness 10 cm. Assume that there is no loss of heat from
the floor and the ceiling. Take the thermal conductivities of cement and brick to be 0.2 W/m°C and 0.5
W/m°C, respectively. If another identical heater is now switched on, along with the old heater, find the steady
state temperature (in °C) inside the room, after a long time, if the outside temperature has now dropped to –
15°C.

(8)
 GUIDED REVISION

SECTION-III : (Maximum
(Maximum Marks: 12)
12)
Numerical Grid Typeɟ(Ranging from 0 to 9)ɟ 3 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. An object can be hanged to a 1.2m long wire of diameter 2 mm, and the wire does not break. However, if the
object is slightly displaced and begins to slowly swing, the wire breaks. If another piece of wire having the
same length and material but wider diameter is used, the speed of the same swinging object at lowest point can
even be 6 m/s. Calculate the least diameter (in mm) of this wider wire.
2. A thermometer has a spherical bulb of volume 1 cm3 having 1 cm3 of mercury. A long cylindrical capillary
tube is connected to spherical bulb. Volumetric coefficient of expansion of mercury is 1.8 × 10 –4 K –1; cross-
section area of capillary is 1.8 × 10 –4 cm2. Ignoring expansion of glass, how far apart (in cm) on the stem are
marks indicating 1Kɟtemperature change.ɟ

3.
Rankers Academy JEE
Two steel wires of radii r and 2r are connected together end to end and tied to a wall as shown. The force
27
stretches the combination by ɟmm. How far does the junction point A move. (in mm)
4

(9)
 GUIDED REVISION

PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A. B A C B B A A B C A
SECTION-I (i)
Q. 11 12
A. D B

Q. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
SECTION-I (ii)
A. A,C A,B A,D B,D A,D B,D B,D A,B,C
Q. 21 22 23
SECTION-I (iii)
A. D B A
Q. 1 2 3 4
SECTION-II
A. 300 4500 1663 3500
Q. 1 2 3
SECTION-III
A. 4 1 6

Rankers Academy JEE

(10)
Rankers Academy JEE

(11)
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_Heat & Thermodynaimcs
SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:30)
Single Correct Answer Type 10 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. In figure, a resistance coil, wired to an external battery, is placed inside a thermally insulated cylinder fitted
with a frictionless piston and containing an ideal diatomic gas. A current i = 200 mA exists in the coil, which
has a resistance R = 350 Ω . If the pressure of the gas remains constant, what should be the speed v (in cm/s) of
the piston, of mass m = 10 kg ? (Take patm = 105 Pa, A = 10 cm2)

(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4

2. The volume thermal expansion coefficient γ for an ideal gas is computed under constant pressure condition.
Expressed in terms of its absolute temperature, the correct expression is :-
(A) γ = 1 (B) γ = 1 (C) γ = 2 (D) γ = 1
2T √ 2T T T

Rankers Academy JEE

3. What is fraction of molecule below an altitude h in atmosphere? Assume uniform gravitational field,
isothermal conditions, mass of a molecule m, Boltzman constant k, temperature T.
(A) f = e(mgh/kT ) (B) f = e−(mgh/kT )
(C) f = 1 – e−(mgh/kT ) (D) f = 1 – e(mgh/kT )
4. A carnot refrigerator operates between – 3°C and 27°C. How much work must be done so as to extract 1 kJ of
heat from the refrigerator?
(A) 100 J (B) 104 J (C) 1000 J (D) 900 J
9
5. Consider the given series combination of carnot cycles. If W1 = W2 then the value of T is (all temperatures are
maintained at their respective values)

(A) 600 K (B) 800 K (C) 700 K (D) 900 K

PHYSICS/ GR_Heat & Thermodynaimcs (1) E-1/8
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

6. In a refrigerator one removes heat from a lower temperature and deposits to the surroundings at a higher
temperature. In this process, mechanical work has to be done, which is provided by an electric motor. If the
motor is of 1kW power, and heat is transferred from – 3°C to 27°C, find the heat taken out of the refrigerator
per second assuming its efficiency is 50% of a perfect engine.
(A) 500 J (B) 5 kJ (C) 12 kJ (D) 19 kJ
7. A household refrigerator with a coefficient of performance 1.2 removes heat from the refrigerated space at the
rate of 60kJ/[Link] would be cost of running this fridge for one month (30 days) (assuming each day it is
used for 4 hours and cost of one electrical unit is 6Rs.):-
(A) 180 Rs. (B) 300 Rs. (C) 480 Rs. (D) 600 Rs.
8. Two Carnot engines A and B are operated in succession. The first one, A receives heat from a source at T1 =
800 K and rejects to sink at T2K. The second engine B receives heat rejected by the first engine and rejects to
another sink at T3 = 300K If the work outputs of two engines are equal, then the value of T2 is :-
(A) 100K (B) 300K (C) 550K (D) 700K
9. An ideal gas is taken from temperature Ti to Tf. Tf > Ti by 3 different reversible processes.

Rankers Academy JEE

(a) isobaric (b) isochoric (c) adiabatic
The change in entropy is
Δ Sb, Δ Su & Δ SS respectively. Choose the correct relation between them.

(A) Δ Sb > Δ Su > Δ Ss (B) Δ Ss > Δ Su > Δ Sb

(C) Δ Sb > Δ Ss > Δ Su (D) Δ Su > Δ Sb > Δ Ss
10. An engine is represented by a cyclic process shown in the T-S (temperature versus entropy)diagram. Here A
represents the area of the region enclosed by the cycle and B of the area below the curve. Compute the
efficiency cycle.

A A B B
(A) (B) (C) (D)
(A + B) (A − B) (A − B) (A + B)

E-2/8 (2) PHYSICS/ GR_Heat & Thermodynaimcs

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 24)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 6 Q. [4 M (–2)]
11. Two moles of O γ = 7 4
2 ( ) at temperature T0 and 3 mole of CO2 ( γ = ) at temperature 2T0 are allowed to
5 3
mix together in a closed adiabatic vessel. The resulting mixture finally comes in thermal equilibrium. Then
(A) Final temperature of the mixture is 23T0 (B) Final temperature of the mixture is 31T0
14 19
(C) Adiabatic exponent of the mixture formed is 14 (D) Adiabatic exponent of the mixture formed is 19
5 14
12. A rectangular narrow U-tube has equal arm lengths and base length, each equal to ℓ . The vertical arms are
filled with mercury up to ℓ /2 and then one end is sealed. By heating the enclosed gas all the mercury is
expelled. If atmospheric pressure is P0, the density of mercury is ρ and cross-sectional area is S, then [Neglect
thermal expansion of glass and mercury]

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) Work done by the gas against the atmospheric pressure is 5 ℓ P0S

(B) Work done by the gas against the gravity is 7

Sρgℓ2
2

4
(C) Work done by the gas against the atmospheric pressure is P0S ℓ
(D) Word done by the gas against the gravity is S ρ g ℓ 2
13. A monoatomic ideal gas undergoes a process ABC :

33P V
(A) Heat given to the gas is .
2
35P V
(B) Heat given to the gas is .
2
8P V
(C) Maximum temperature of the gas during the process is .
nR
4P V
(D) Maximum temperature of the gas during the process is .
nR

PHYSICS/ GR_Heat & Thermodynaimcs (3) E-3/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

14. An insulating cylinder contains equal volumes of He and O2 separated by a massless freely moving adiabatic
piston as shown. The gas is compressed by moving the insulating piston so that volume of He becomes half.
Select the correct alternative(s).

(A) Pressure in He chamber will be equal to pressure in O2 chamber

(B) Pressure in He chamber will be less then pressure in O2 chamber
(C) Volume of He chamber will be equal to volume of O2 chamber
(LA)
(D) Volume of O2 chamber will be .
25/21
(2)
15. One mole of an ideal gas is carried through a thermodynamic cycle as shown in the figure. The cycle consists
of an isochoric, an isothermal and an adiabatic processes. The adiabatic exponent of the gas is γ . Choose the
correct option(s).

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) γ = ln 6 ln 5 (C) BC is adiabatic (D) AC is adiabatic
(B) γ =
ln 3 ln 3
16. A block of ice of mass 10 gm is in thermal equilibrium in 10 gm of water both are in contact of a conducting
movable massless piston on a cylinder containing 3 moles of an ideal diatomic gas. In thermal equilibrium
with water, the walls of cylinder are adiabatic and heat lost to surrounding is negligible. The gas is heated
slowly by a heater. [Given Lf = 80 cal/gm, R = 25/3 J/mole – k, SW = 1 cal/gm]

(A) work done by the gas by the time ice melts completely is zero.
(B) Net heat absorbed by the gas by the time ice melts is zero.
14650
(C) Net heat supplied by the heater by the time water starts boiling cal.
3
(D) Net heat supplied by the heater by the time water starts boiling 2800 cal.

E-4/8 (4) PHYSICS/ GR_Heat & Thermodynaimcs

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (iii) : (Maximum Marks: 18)
Linked Comprehension Type (Single Option Correct) (1 Para × 4 Q.) (1 Para × 2 Q.) [3 M (–1)]
Paragraph for Questions 17 - 20
Two cylinder A and B having piston connected by massless rod (as shown in figure). The cross-sectional area of two
cylinders are same & equal to ‘S’. The cylinder A contains m gm of an ideal gas at Pressure P & temperature T0. The
cylinder B contain identical gas at same temperature T0 but has different mass. The piston is held at the state in the
position so that volume of gas in cylinder A & cylinder B are same & is equal to V0.

The walls & piston of cylinder A are thermally insulated, whereas cylinder B is maintained at temperature T0
reservoir. The whole system is in vacuum. Now the piston is slowly released and it moves towards left & mechanical
V0
equilibrium is reached at the state when the volume of gas in cylinder A becomes . Then (here γ for gas = 1.5)
2
17. The mass of gas in cylinder B
(A) 2 2 m √ (B) 3 √ 2m (C) √ 2m (D) none

Rankers Academy JEE

18. The change in internal energy of gas in cylinder A
(C) P V0
(A) ( 2–
√ 1) PV0 (B) 2( √ 2– 1) PV0 (D) none
(√2 − 1)
19. If work done by gas in cylinder B is WB & work done by gas in cylinder A is WA then
(A) WA = – WB (B) |WA| > |WB|
(C) |WA| < |WB| (D) we can’t say anything
20. What will be the compressive force in connecting rod at equilibrium
(A) PS (B) 2PS √ (C) 23/2 PS (D) none
Paragraph for Questions 21 and 22
A self-contained machine only inputs two equal steady streams of hot and cold water at temperatures T1 and
T2. Its only output is a single high-speed jet of water. The heat capacity per unit mass of water, C, may be
assumed to be independent of temperature. The machine is in a steady state and the kinetic energy in the
incoming streams is negligible.

21. What is the speed of the jet of water in the jet?

(A) v = c (T1 + T2 − 2T )
√ (B) v = √c (T1 + T2 + 2T )

(C) v = 2√c (T1 + T2 + 2T ) (D) v = 2√c (T1 + T2 − 2T )

PHYSICS/ GR_Heat & Thermodynaimcs (5) E-5/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

22. What is the maximum possible speed of the jet ?

(A) vmax = √c (√T1 \; + √ T2 ) (B) vmax = √c (√T1 − √T2 )

(C) vmax = √c (T1 + T2 ) (D) vmax = √c (T1 − T2 )

SECTION-II : (Maximum Marks: 32)
Numerical-Answer-Type questions (Non Negative Integer) 8 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. A long container has air enclosed inside at room temperature and atmospheric pressure (105 pa). It has a
volume of 20,000 cc. The area of cross section is 100 cm2 and force constant of spring is kspring = 1000N/m.
We push the right piston isothermally and slowly till it reaches the original position of the left piston which is
movable. What is the final length of air column in cm. Assume that spring is initially relaxed.

2. Figure shows an ideal gas. Its pressure, volume & temperature are P0, V0 & T0 respectively. Thin U-tube
contains mercury. It is seen that when 20 cm of extra mercury is added in limb B of U-tube and temperature of
gas is doubled, level of A is maintained at its position. Consider surrounding to be vacuum. Find the initial
pressure of gas (in cm of Hg.)

Rankers Academy JEE

3. A balloon is filled with helium at the atmospheric pressure P0. The volume of the balloon is V0. The balloon is
made of the material of mass m and density ρ . After being released, the balloon bursts at an altitude where the
atmospheric pressure is (P0/2). Immediately before bursting, the balloon has a volume of 1.25V0. The
maximum stress that the balloon material can withstand is given by α P0, find the value of α . Assume that the
temperature of helium remains constant, the balloon remains spherical, and the density of the material remains
virtually constant. [Take : V0 = 8 m3, r = 1500 kg/m3, m = 18 kg]
4. An ideal gas at NTP is enclosed in a adiabatic vertical cylinder having area of cross section A = 27cm2,
between two light movable pistons as shown in the figure. Spring with force constant k = 3700 N/m is in a
relaxed state initially. Now the lower piston is moved upwards a height h/2, h being the initial length of gas
column. It is observed that the upper piston moves up by a distance h/16. ( γ = 1.5) The final temperature (in
K) of the gas is :-

E-6/8 (6) PHYSICS/ GR_Heat & Thermodynaimcs

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

5. A heat pump used for heating shown in figure is essentially an air conditioner installed backward. It extracts
energy from colder air outside and deposits it in a warmer room. Suppose the ratio of the actual energy
entering the room to the work done by the device's motor is 20.0% of the theoretical maximum ratio.
Determine the energy entering the room per joule of work done by the motor, given that the inside temperature
is 27.0°C and the outside temperature is – 3°C.

6. An ideal (Carnot) freezer in a kitchen has a constant temperature of 260 K, whereas the air in the kitchen has a
constant temperature of 300 K. Suppose the insulation for the freezer is not perfect and conducts energy into
the freezer at a rate of 0.150 W. The average power required for the freezer's motor to maintain the constant

7. Rankers Academy JEE

temperature in the freezer is n W. Find the value of n.
260
A carnot engine working between 400 K and 800 K has a work output of 1200 J per cycle. What is the amount
of heat energy supplied to the engine from source per cycle (in J) ?
8. An electric freezer is turned on inside a tent for a long time. It is 0 °C outside the tent, +1 °C inside the tent,
and – 13 °C inside the freezer. T0 would be the equilibrium temperature inside the tent if another identical
freezer is turned on inside the tent ? The outside temperature remains the same. The freezers are identical and
−1767 + √17672 + 15288 α
follow the Carnot cycle if T0 = = . Find α .
2α
SECTION-III : (Maximum Marks: 8)
Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 2 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. One mole of an ideal monoatomic gas is taken from state A to state B through the process P = 3 T1/2. It is
2
found that its temperature increases by 115.2 K in this process. Now it is taken from state B to C through a
1
process for which internal energy is related to volume as U = V1/2. The volume at B is 100 m3 and at C it is
2
25
1600 m3, then the total work performed by the gas is α × 102 J. Fill a in OMR sheet. (Use R = J/mol-K)
3

PHYSICS/ GR_Heat & Thermodynaimcs (7) E-7/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

2. An ideal monoatomic gas is enclosed in a vertical cylinder of cross section area A and length ℓ , under
frictionless piston connected to spring of spring constant K. Atmosphere pressure is such that in absence of gas
under the piston, equilibrium of piston is achieved when piston just touches the bottom of the cylinder and
spring is in stretched configuation. Q amount of heat is supplied to gas slowly to move piston to the upper
2
edge. Initially volume occupied by gas is 1 rd of the volume of cylinder. If Q = 2 λ , K ℓ find λ , (through the
3 9
motion of the piston spring is in stretched configuration)

SECTION-IV : (Maximum Marks: 8)

Matrix Match Type (4 × 5) (One or more options correct) 1 Q. [8 M; (for each entry +2(0)]

Rankers Academy JEE

1. A monatomic ideal gas at pressure P0 & volume V0 can be made to undergo 4 different process on PV diagram
as shown. For each of the processes, match with entries in column-II. (Symbols have their usual meanings).

Column-I Column-II
(A) Process – 1 (P) Δ Q + ve
(B) Process – 2 (Q) Δ U + ve
(C) Process – 3 (R) W – ve
(D) Process – 4 (S) Temperature decreases
(T) Δ Q – ve

E-8/8 (8) PHYSICS/ GR_Heat & Thermodynaimcs

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
ANSWER KEY GR_Heat & Thermodynaimcs
PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SECTION-I (i)
A. B D C C B D D C A A
Q. 11 12 13 14 15 16
SECTION-I (ii)
A. A,D A,B A,C A,D A,D A,B,C

Q. 17 18 19 20 21 22
SECTION-I (iii)
A. B B C C A B
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SECTION-II
A. 100 20 375 364 2 6 2400 137
Q. 1 2
SECTION-III
A. 5 8
Q. 1
SECTION-IV
A. A->R,B->PQ,C->PQ,D->ST

Rankers Academy JEE

(9)
Rankers Academy JEE

(10)
Rankers Academy JEE

(11)
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_Fluid Statics & Dynamics
SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:33)
Single Correct Answer Type 11 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. A test tube filled with water is being spun around in an ultracentrifuge with angular velocity ω . The test tube is
lying along a radius and the free surface of the water is at radius r0 (Figure). The length of the test tube is ℓ and
ρ is the density of the water. Ignore gravity and ignore atmospheric pressure. Choose the correct statement.

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) The pressure at the mid point of test tube is given by 1 ρ ℓ ω 2 ( ℓ + 4r0 ).
8
(B) The pressure at the mid point of test tube is given by 1 ℓ
ρ ℓ ω 2 ( + r0 ).
2 2

(C) The pressure at the mid point of test tube is given by 1 ρ ℓ ω 2 ℓ ( + r0 ).

4 2
(D) The pressure remains constant through out the tube.
2. A thin uniform cylindrical shell, closed at both ends, is partially filled with water. It is floating vertically in
water in half-submerged state. If ρ C is the relative density of the material of the shell with respect to water,
then the correct statement is that the shell is
(A) more than half-filled if ρ C is less than 0.5
(B) more than half-filled if ρ C is more than 1.0
(C) half-filled if ρ C is more than 0.5
(D) less than half-filled if ρ C is less than 0.5

PHYSICS/ GR_Fluid Statics & Dynamics (1) E-1/10

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL

3. A certain fire extinguisher consists of a large sealed tank with a thin tube leading from the bottom of the tank
to an exit nozzle; the air above the liquid in the tank is at an overpressure ptank with respect to atmospheric
pressure p0. The exit nozzle is at the same level as the top of the liquid; both are a distance y above the bottom
of the tank (see figure). The liquid has density ρ . Find an expression for the speed of the stream of liquid
emerging from the nozzle.

2 (ptan k + p0 ) 2ptan k (ptan k + p0 ) ptan k

(A) √ (B) √ (C) √
(D) √

ρ ρ 2ρ ρ
4. A tank full of water has a small hole at its bottom. Let t1 be the time taken to empty first one third of the tank
and t2 be the time taken to empty second one third of the tank and t3 be the time taken to empty rest of the tank
then

5. Rankers Academy JEE

(A) t1 = t2 = t3 (B) t1 > t2 > t3 (C) t1 < t2 < t3 (D) t1 > t2 < t3
A flat plate moves normally with a speed v1 towards a horizontal jet of water of uniform area of cross-section.
The jet discharges water at the rate of volume V per second at a speed of v2. The density of water is ρ . Assume
that water splashes along the surface of the plate at right angles to the original motion. The magnitude of the
force acting on the plate due to jet of water is : –
V 2
(A) ρ Vv1 (B) ρ ( ) (v
1 + v2 )
v2
ρV (D) ρ V(v1 + v2)
(C) v21
v1 + v2
6. A small hole is made at the bottom of a symmetrical jar as shown in figure. A liquid is filled into the jar upto a
certain height. The rate of descension of liquid is independent of the level of the liquid in the jar. Then the
surface of the jar is a surface of revolution of the curve -

(A) y = kx4 (B) y = kx2 (C) y = kx3 (D) y = kx5

E-2/10 (2) PHYSICS/ GR_Fluid Statics & Dynamics

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL

7. Water of density ρ in a clean aquarium forms a meniscus, as illustrated in the figure. Calculate the difference
in height h between the centre and the edge of the meniscus. The surface tension of water is γ .

(A) 2γ (B) γ (C) 1 γ (D) γ

√ √ √ 2√
ρg ρg 2 ρg ρg
8. Figure (a) and (b) show water drop and mercury drop in two identical conical glass pipes, then

(A) The water drop tends to move towards narrow end and mercury drop towards wide end.
(B) The water drop tends to move towards wide end and mercury drop towards narrow end.
(C) both tend to move towards wide end.
(D) both tend to move towards narrow end.
9.
Rankers Academy JEE
A light open rigid wire frame floats on the surface of water as shown in figure. What force will act on the
frame, immediately after some soap solution is dropped inside it? α 1 and α 2 are the surface tensions of water
and soap respectively ( α 1 > α 2)

(A) zero (B) ( α 1 – α 2) ℓ

(C) ( α 1 + α 2) (4a + 2b + ℓ ) (D) ( α 1 – α 2) (4a + 2b – ℓ )
10. A drop of water volume 0.05 cm3 is pressed between two glass-plates, as a consequence of which, it spreads
between the plates. The area of contact with each plate is 40 cm2. If the surface tension of water is 70
dyne/cm, the minimum normal force required to seperate out the two glass plates in newton is approximately
(assuming angle of contact is zero) :
(A) 45 N (B) 100 N (C) 90 N (D) None of these

PHYSICS/ GR_Fluid Statics & Dynamics (3) E-3/10

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL

11. A container of width 2a is filled with a liquid. A thin wire of weight per unit length λ is gently placed over the
liquid surface in the middle of the surface as shown in the figure. As a result, the liquid surface is depressed by
a distance y (y << a). Determine the surface tension of the liquid.

(A) λ ag (B) 3 λ ag (C) 2 λ ag (D) None of these

2y 2y 3y
SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 16)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 4 Q. [4 M (–2)]
12. A thin walled hemispherical shell of mass m and radius R is pressed against a smooth vertical wall. Through a
very small aperture at its top water of density ρ is filled in it completely. Minimum magnitude of force is to be

Rankers Academy JEE

applied to the shell for liquid not to escape from it. Weight of hemispherical shell is mg and total mass of water
is M = 2 π R3 ρ :
3

(A) Horizontal component of net force is 1 π R3 ρ g

2
9 2
(B) Net external force is Mg m
√ + (1 + )
4 M
(C) Vertical component of force is (M + m)g
(m + M)
(D) Direction of net force is given by θ = arc tan , where θ is from horizontal direction.
3M

E-4/10 (4) PHYSICS/ GR_Fluid Statics & Dynamics

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL

13. A cubical block is floating in a liquid with one third of its volume immersed in the liquid. When the whole
system accelerates upwards with acceleration of g/2 :-
(A) the fraction of volume immersed in the liquid will change.
(B) the buoyancy force on the block will change.
(C) the buoyancy force will increase by 50 percent.
(D) the pressure in the liquid will increased.
14. A non-viscous liquid of constant density 1000 kg/m3 flows in a streamline motion along a tube of variable
cross section. The tube is kept inclined in the vertical plane as shown in the figure. The area of cross section of
the tube at two points P and Q at heights of 2 meters and 5 meters are respectively 4 × 10 –3m2 and 8 × 10 –3
m3. The velocity of the liquid at point P is 1 m/s and fluid flow from P to Q, then

(A) the work done per unit volume by the pressure is + 29625 J/m3.

Rankers Academy JEE

(B) the work done per unit volume by gravity forces is – 30000 J/m3.
(C) Net work done per unit volume is zero
(D) velocity of liquid at point Q is 0.5 m/s
15. Consider a situation in which there is a Newtonian fluid between two long coaxial uniformly moving cylinders
of radius R and 2R.

(A) Force per unit length required to keep the inner cylinder moving is 4 π η v0
(B) Force per unit length required to keep the inner cylinder moving is 6 π η v0.
ℓ n2
(C) Distance of the point from the axis at which speed of fluid is zero is 21/3R.
(D) Distance of the point from the axis at which speed of fluid is zero is √ 2R.

PHYSICS/ GR_Fluid Statics & Dynamics (5) E-5/10

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (iii) : (Maximum Marks: 21)
Linked Comprehension Type (Single Option Correct) (1 Para × 3 Q.) (2 Para × 2 Q.) [3 M (–1)]
Paragraph for Questions 16 - 18
When liquid medicine of density ρ is to be put in the eye, it is done with the help of a dropper. As the bulb on
the top of the dropper is pressed, a drop forms at the opening of the dropper. We wish to estimate the size of
the drop. We first assume that the drop formed at the opening is spherical because that requires a minimum
increase in its surface energy. To determine the size, we calculate the net vertical force due to the surface
tension T when the radius of the drop is R. When this force becomes smaller than the weight of the drop, the
drop gets detached from the dropper.
16. If the radius of the opening of the dropper is r, the vertical force due to the surface tension on the drop of
radius R (assuming r << R) is
(A) 2 π rT (B) 2 π RT (C) 2 π r2 T (D) 2 π R2 T
R r
17. If r = 5 × 10 –4 m, ρ = 103 kgm –3, g = 10 ms –2, T = 0.11 Nm –1, the radius of the drop when it detaches from
the dropper is approximately
(A) 1.4 × 10 –3 m (B) 3.3 × 10 –3 m (C) 2.0 × 10 –3 m (D) 4.1 × 10 –3 m

Rankers Academy JEE

18. After the drop detaches, its surface energy is
(A) 1.4 × 10 –6 J (B) 2.7 × 10 –6 J (C) 5.4 × 10 –6 J (D) 8.1 × 10 –6 J
Paragraph for Questions 19 and 20
A closed cylindrical container with a vertical axis is completely filled with liquid ( ρ ω ). A plastic bead of
density ρ body and volume V is placed at distance R from the axis and is anchored to the bottom of the
container by a thin thread of length ℓ . If as a result of the containers revolutions, the beads sink by h and final
distance of bead from axis is r. (In the final state the total content of the container rotates at the same angular
speed.)

19. What is force exerted by liquid on the bead ?

(A) ρ ω V g (B) ( ρ ω – rbody) V g
(C) ( ρ ω – rbody) V 2 2
√
g 2 + ( ω 2 r) (D) ρ ω V √
g 2 + ( ω 2 r)
20. What is ω :-
(R + r)g (R − r)g (R + r)g (R − r)g
(A) ω = √ (B) ω = √ (C) ω = √ (D) ω = √

( ℓ + h)r ( ℓ − h)r ( ℓ − h)r ( ℓ + h)r

E-6/10 (6) PHYSICS/ GR_Fluid Statics & Dynamics

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL

Paragraph for Questions 21 and 22

A level controller is shown in the figure. It consists of a thin circular plug of diameter 10cm and a cylindrical
float of diameter 20cm tied together with a light rigid rod of length 10cm. The plug fits in snugly in a drain
hole at the bottom of the tank which opens into atmosphere. As water fills up and the level reaches height h,
the plug opens. The float has a mass 3kg and the plug may be assumed as massless.

21. Find h (in m) :-

(A) 2(3 + π ) (B) (3 + π ) (C) (3 + π ) (D) 2(3 + π )
15 π 15 π 10 π 10 π
22. Determine the level of water (in meter) in the tank when the plug closes again
(A) 2(3 + π ) (B) (3 + π ) (C) (3 + π ) (D) 2(3 + π )
15 π 15 π 10 π 10 π
SECTION-II (i) : (Maximum Marks: 8)
Numerical Answer type Questions (Upto Second Decimal Place) 2 Q. [4 M (0)]

Rankers Academy JEE

1. A U-tube filled with a liquid of volumetric coefficient of 10 –5/°C lies in a vertical plane. The height of liquid
column in the left vertical limb is 100 cm. The liquid in the left vertical limb is maintained at a temperature =
0°C while the liquid in the right limb is maintained at a temperature = 100°C. Find the difference (in cm) in
levels in the two limbs.
2. An expansible balloon filled with air floats on the surface of a lake with 2/3 of its volume submerged. How
deep must it be sunk in the water so that it is just inequilibrium neither sinking further nor rising? It is assumed
that the temperature of the water is constant & that the height of the water barometer is 9 meters.
SECTION-II (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 16)
Numerical-Answer-Type questions (Non Negative Integer) 4 Q. [4 M (0)]
3. Figure shows a cubical block of side 10 cm and relative density 1.5 suspended by a wire of cross sectional area
10 –6 m2. The breaking stress of the wire is 7 × 106 N/m2. The block is placed in a beaker of base area 200 cm2
and initially i.e. at t = 0, the top surface of water & the block coincide. There is a pump at the bottom corner
which ejects 2 cm3 of water per sec. Find the time (in sec) at which the wire will break.

PHYSICS/ GR_Fluid Statics & Dynamics (7) E-7/10

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL

4. A non uniform cylinderical rod of mass 5kg, length 2m and radius 0.1m is having its center of mass at a
1
distance m from the centre and lying on the axis of the rod. The rod is kept in a liquid of uniform density
2
1400 kg/m3. The moment of inertia of the rod about the centre of mass is 4 kg-m2. Find the angular
acceleration (in SI unit) of point A of the rod just after the rod is released from the position shown in figure.

5. A horizontal pipeline carries water in a streamline flow. At a point along the pipe, where the cross-sectional
area is 10 cm2, the water velocity is 1 m/s and the pressure is 4000 Pa. The pressure of water at another point
where the cross-sectional area is 5 cm2, is..... Pa. (Density of water = 103 kg. m –3).
6. A block of wood is floating in water such that 1/3rd of it is submerged in water when the same block is floated
in alcohol, 1/2 of it’s volume is submerged. Now a mixture of water and alcohol is made taking equal volume
of both and block is floated in it. What is the % of it’s volume that is now submerged.
SECTION-III : (Maximum Marks: 16)
Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 4 Q. [4 M (0)]

Rankers Academy JEE

1. For the arrangement shown in the figure. The time interval in seconds after which the water jet ceases to cross
the wall is found to be ( α )3. Area of the cross section of the tank A = 5 m 2 and area of the orifice a = 32
√

cm2. [Assume that the container remaining fixed]. Find the value of α . (Take g = 10 m/s2)

2. A glass capillary sealed at the upper end is of length 0.11 m and internal diameter 2 × 10 –5 m. This tube is
immersed vertically into a liquid of surface tension 5.06 × 10 –2 N/m. When the length x × 10 –2 m of the tube
is immersed in liquid then the liquid level inside and outside the capillary tube becomes the same, then the
N
value of x is : (Assume atmospheric pressure is 1.01 × 105 )
m2
3. Due to the excess pressure of surface tension find the change in the radius (in Å) of a liquid drop of radius 1
mm, surface tension 0.075 N/m and Bulk modulus 1.25 × 10+8 N/m2.
4. The velocity distribution in a viscous flow over a plate is given by u = 4y – y2 for y ≤ 2m where u is velocity
in m/s at a point which is at a distance y from the plate. If the coefficient of dynamic viscosity is 1.5 in SI
units. The shear stress at y = 0 in N/m2 is :-

E-8/10 (8) PHYSICS/ GR_Fluid Statics & Dynamics

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-IV : (Maximum Marks: 16)
Matrix Match Type (4 × 5) (One or more options correct) 2 Q. [8 M; (for each entry +2(0)]
1. An evacuated thin tube has two tight caps C1 and C2 at its ends. The tube is adjusted as shown in the figure
below. Atmospheric pressure = P and density of the liquid = d, Neglect surface tension of liquid.
Match the entities of columns

Column-I Column-II
P
h1 > , h2 = If C2 is opened first and then C1 is opened, liquid level in the left arm of the tube
(A) dg (P)
0 will be on level with liquid in the pot.

Rankers Academy JEE

P
h1 > , h2 > If C1 is opened with C2 closed, liquid will rise in the left arm but tube will not be
(B) dg (Q)
0 fully filled.
P
h1 < , h2 >
(C) dg (R) If C1 is opened with C2 closed, tube will be fully filled with liquid.
0
P
h1 + h2 < ,
(D) dg (S) If C1 is opened first and then C2 is opened, liquid will flow down continuously.
h2 > 0
(T) After any of the above action pressure at the mid point of tube AB is non-zero

PHYSICS/ GR_Fluid Statics & Dynamics (9) E-9/10

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL

2. Column I Column II
(A) Body is a block lying on a rough inclined (P) Force exerted by A on body can be equal to it's weight
plane. Angle of inclination θ < angle of in magnitude.
repose. A is inclined surface

(B) Body is a ball falling in liquid (Q) If density of body is somehow increased without
with terminal velocity. A is liquid. changing r, it's state of motion (constant acceleration /
constant velocity) or equilibrium position will be
disturbed.

(C) Body is a spherical ball rolling purely on (R) Work done by the force exerted by A on the body is
inclined plane; inclined at an angle equal zero.
to angle of repose. The inclined surface is
A.

Rankers Academy JEE

(D) Body is m1 hanging on an ideal pulley (S) Mechanical energy of body is constant as time passes.
system. A is string m1 < m2.

(T) The kinetic energy of body is constant as time passes

E-10/10 (10) PHYSICS/ GR_Fluid Statics & Dynamics

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL
ANSWER KEY GR_Fluid Statics & Dynamics
PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A. A A B C B A A AB A
SECTION-I (i)
Q. 11
A. A

Q. 12 13 14 15
SECTION-I (ii)
A. B,C B,C,D A,B B,C
Q. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SECTION-I (iii)
A. C A B D B A C
Q. 1 2
SECTION-II (i)
A. 0.1 4.5
Q. 3 4 5 6
SECTION-II (ii)
A. 100 110 2500 40
Q. 1 2 3 4
SECTION-III
A. 5 1 4 6

Q. 1 2
SECTION-IV
A. A->PQ,B->PQ,C->PRST,D->PRST A->PQRST,B->PQT,C->RS,D->Q

Rankers Academy JEE

(11)
 GUIDED REVISION

SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:12)

Marks:12)
Single Correct Answer Type 4 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. A particle of mass 1 kg, executing simple harmonic motion of period 20 s, crosses the mean position at t = 0
with velocity p cm/s.
(A) the maximum acceleration of the particle is 10 cm/s2
ș when it is 4 cm from the mean position, its velocity is 6p/10 cm/s
3π 2
Ț the kinetic energy of the particle when its displacement is 5 cm from the mean position is J
8 × 106
ț its velocity at displacement 6 cm from the mean position is 8 π /10 cm/s
2. A uniform rod of length 2 ℓ rocks to and fro on the top of a rough semicircular fixed cylinder of radius a. The
period of small oscillations, of rod is

2π ℓ (B) ℓ (C) 2 π a (D) πℓ

(A)

Rankers Academy JEE

2π
3ga 3g 3g 3ga
3. In the figure shown the spring is relaxed. The spring is compressed by 2 A and released. Mass m attached with
the spring collides with the wall & loses two third of its kinetic energy & returns. Find the time after which
the spring will have maximum compression first time after releasing. (Neglect Friction)

(A) 13 π m (B) 17 π m (C) 17 π 2m (D) 7 π 2m

12 K 12 K 12 K 12 K
44. A massless rod is hinged at O. A string carrying a mass m at one end is attached to point A on the rod so that
OA = a. At another point B (OB= b) of the rod , a horizontal spring of force constant k is attached as shown.
Find the period of small vertical oscillations of mass m around its equilibrium position.

(A) π m (B) 2 π m (C) 2 π a m (D) 2 π b m

K K b K a K
(1)
 GUIDED REVISION

SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum

(Maximum Marks: 80)
80)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 20 Q. [4 M (–2)]
5. A particle is performing SHM with its position given as x = 2 + 5 sin π t + π where x (in m) &
6
t (in sec). Which of the following is/are correct :-
(A) Equilibrium position is at x = 2m
(B) Maximum speed of particle is 5 π m/s
(C) At t = 0 particle is 2.5 m away from mean position moving in negative direction
(D) At t = 0, x = 4.5 m; acceleration of particle is – π 2(4.5) m/s2
6. Figure shows the potential-energy diagram and the total energy line of a particle oscillating on a spring.

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) the amplitude of oscillation of particle is 6 cm.
(B) the spring constant is 4.44 kN/m.
(C) the mass of particle is 1kg.
(D) the maximum kinetic energy of particle is at x = 20 cm.
7. A linear harmonic oscillator of force constant 2 × 106 Nm-1 and amplitude 0.01 m has a total mechanical
energy of 160 J. Its
(A) maximum potential energy is 100 J
(B) maximum kinetic energy is 100 J
(C) maximum potential energy is 160 J
(D) minimum potential energy is zero.
8. A body is performing S.H.M., then its
(A) average total energy of SHM per cycle is equal to its maximum kinetic energy.
(B) average kinetic energy per cycle is equal to half of its maximum kinetic energy.
(C) mean velocity over a complete cycle is equal to 2/ π times of its maximum velocity.
(D) root mean square velocity is 1/√2 times of its maximum velocity

(2)
 GUIDED REVISION

9. The potential energy of a particle of mass 0.1 kg, moving along the x-axis, is given by U = 5x (x – 4)J, where
x is in metres. It can be concluded that :
(A) the particle is acted upon by a constant force. (B) the speed of the particle is maximum at x = 2 m.
(C) the particle executes simple harmonic motion (D) the period of oscillation of the particle is π /5 s.
10. The system shown in the figure can move on a smooth surface. The spring is initially compressed by 6 cm and
then released .

(A) the particles perform SHM with time period π sec

10
(B) the block of mass 3 kg perform SHM with amplitude 4 cm
(C) the block of mass 6 kg will have maximum momentum 2.40 kg m/s
(D) none of these
11. A simple pendulum is oscillating in a stationary lift with a time period T and an angular amplitude θ 0. When it
is passing through the mean position, the lift starts accelerating upwards.

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) The time period of its oscillation will increase (B) Its angular amplitude would increase.
(C) The time period of its oscillation would decrease (D) Its angular amplitude would decrease.
12. A bob of mass 2m hangs by a string attached to the block of mass m of a spring block system. The whole
arrangement is in a state of equilibrium. The bob of mass 2m is pulled down slowly by a distance x0 and
released.

(A) For x = 3mg

0 maximum tension in string is 4mg
k
(B) For x > 3mg
0 , minimum tension in string is mg
k
(C) 1 k
Frequency of oscillation of system is , for all non-zero values of x0
2π
3m
(D) 3mg
The motion will remain simple harmonic for x0 ≤
k

(3)
 GUIDED REVISION

13. Consider a spring that exerts the following restoring force

F = – kx for x > 0
F = – 4kx for x < 0
A mass m on a frictionless surface is attached to the spring displaced to x = A by stretching the spring and released :
(A) The period of motion will be T = 3 π m
2 k
(B) the most negative value the mass m can reach will be x = – A
2
(C) The time taken to move from x = A to x = – A
, straight away will be equal to 5 π m
2 8 k
(D) The total energy of oscillations will be 5 2
kA
2
14. A ring of mass m, radius r can oscillate in a vertical plane about is top most point 'O' as shown. Axis is normal
to the plane of ring. Maximum speed of lowest point 'P' of ring is v.

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) 2r
Time period of SHM for small amplitudes is 2 π
g
(B) Acceleration of centre of mass of ring at lowest position is zero.
(C) Hinge force when centre of mass is at lowest point is mv2
4r
(D) Mechanical energy of oscillation is mv2
(when potential energy at mean position is taken as zero.)
4
15. An uniform rod of mass m and length ℓ is pivoted at top and it can perform angular SHM in vertical plane
2π
according to equation θ = θ 0 sin ω t. At time t = a point mass m (at rest) sticks to lowest end of rod.
ω

(A) New time period of rod will be times of the 2

time period before collision.
3
(B) New angular amplitude is θ0
12
(C) New angular amplitude is θ0
4
(D) There will always be loss of kinetic energy of rod, irrespective of time at which mass sticks to rod.
(4)
 GUIDED REVISION

16. Figure shows two particles connected with a light rod and entire arrangement hangs on a elastic wire. Neglect
any gravitational effect, θ 0 = maximum angular displacement of the particles, C = torsional stiffness of wire.
Mark the correct statements :-

(A) 2m
Time period of oscillation is π ℓ
C
(B) C θ 20
Maximum tension in the rod is
ℓ
(C) The energy of oscillation is 1 2
Cθ
2 0
(D) The maximum tangential acceleration of particle is C θ0
mℓ
17. A block suspended from a spring at natural length and is free to move vertically in the y-direction. Mark the
CORRECT statement (s) :-

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) Mass is released when y = 0; the maximum value of y reached by the mass m is 2mg/k
(B) Mass is released when y = 0; the maximum value of y reached by the mass m is mg/k
(C) Due to air resistance the mass settles down into an equilibrium position yeq, the mechanical
1
energy loss is (m2g2/k)
2
(D) Due to air resistance the mass settles down into an equilibrium position yeq, the mechanical energy
lost is (m2g2/k)
18. A particle performing S.H.M. undergoes displacement of A/2 (where A = amplitude of S.H.M.) in one second.
At t = 0 the particle was located at either extreme position or mean position. The time period of S.H.M. can be
: (consider all possible cases) :-
(A) 12 s (B) 2.4 s (C) 6s (D) 1.2 s

(5)
 GUIDED REVISION

19. Two particles A and B are performing SHM along same straight line with same amplitude a and same angular
frequency ω . At t = 0, A is left extreme and B is at a distance a/2 from mean position to the right and moving
toward mean position. Then:
(A) their phase difference is 5 π (B) their phase difference is 2 π
3 3
(C) time after which they cross each other is 2 π (D) time after which they cross each other is π
3ω 3ω
20. If the figure shown, the mass of the disc as well as that of the trolley is M. The spring is ideal and has stiffness
k. The trolley can move horizontally on the floor without friction, and the disc can roll on the trolley surface
without slipping. The spring is compressed and the system released so that oscillations begin. At the instant of
release, magntiude of :

(A) Acceleration of center of disc = twice of that of trolley

(B) Acceleration of center of disc = thrice of that of trolley
(C) Spring force is four times of friction.

Rankers Academy JEE

(D) Spring force is two times of friction.
21. A block of mass m is attached to a fixed support by a horizontal spring with force constant k and negligible
mass as shown in figure. Hooke's law describes the spring both in extension and in compression. The block
placed on a very long horizontal board, with which it has coefficient of static friction μs and a smaller
coefficient of kinetic friction μk. The board moves to the right at constant speed v. Assume the block spends
most of its time sticking to the board and moving to the right, so the speed v is very small in comparison to the
average speed the block has as it slips back toward the left. Ignore the time when the speed of block changes
from v to 0 and from 0 to v. Mark the correct statement(s):

(A) The maximum extension of the spring from its unstretched position is very nearly given by μ s mg
k
(B) The block oscillates about an equilibrium position at which the spring is stretched by μ k mg
k
(C) ( μ s − μ k ) mg
The amplitude of the block's motion is A =
k
(D) 2 ( μ s − μ k ) mg m
The period of the block's for a complete oscillation is T = +π
vk k

(6)
 GUIDED REVISION

22. In the arrangement shown, the spring of force constant 600N/m is in the unstretched position. The coefficient
of friction between the two blocks is 0.4 and that between the lower block & ground surface is zero. If both the
blocks are displaced slightly and released, the system executes SHM.

(A) Time period of their oscillation if they do not slip w.r.t. each other is π /5 sec.
(B) Time period of their oscillation if they do not slip w.r.t. each other is π /3 sec.
(C) The maximum amplitude of the oscillation for which sliding between them does not occur is 5 cm.
(D) The maximum amplitude of the oscillation for which sliding between them does not occur is 2 cm.

A solid disk of mass M and radius R on a vertical shaft. The shaft is attached to a coil spring which exerts a
linear restoring torque of magnitude C θ where θ is the angle measured from the static equilibrium position
and C is a constant. Neglect the mass of the shaft and the spring and assume the bearings to be frictionless.

Rankers Academy JEE

23. If the disc is rotated by θ and released :-

(A) The disks will execute SHM. (B) The disks will not execute SHM.
(C) 1 2C (D) 1 C
The frequency of motion is . The frequency of motion is .
2π MR2 2π 3MR2
24. Suppose that the disk is moving according to the θ = θ 0sin ( ω t) where ω is the frequency found in part (a) At
time t1 = π / ω a ring of stickly putty of mass M and radius R is dropped concentrically on the disk,
(A) 1 2C (B) 1 2C
The new frequency of motion is The new frequency of motion is .
2π 3MR2 2π MR2
(C) The new amplitude of motion is θ0 (D) The new amplitude of motion is θ0
.
.
2 3

(7)
 GUIDED REVISION

SECTION-II : (Maximum
(Maximum Marks: 24)
24)
Numerical-Answer-Type
rical-Answer-Type questions (Non Negative IInteger) 6 Q. [4 M (0)]
(0
1. A uniform rod of mass m is suspended on two springs at equal distance from ends as shown. The force
constants of the springs are k and 3k. During the vertical oscillations of the system, the rod remains horizontal.
Find the angular frequency (in rad./s) of these osicllations. The strings and the pulley are ideal. (Given m = 3
kg, k = 676 N/m)

2. A solid uniform cylinder of mass m performs small oscillations due to the action of two springs combined stiffness
xm
equal to k (figure). The period of these oscillations in the absence of sliding is T = π . Then find x :
2k

Rankers Academy JEE

3. A car accelerates uniformly from rest. Initially, its door is slightly ajar (open). Calculate how far (in m) the car
travels before the door slams shut. Assume the door has a frictionless hinge, a uniform mass distribution and a
length of 1.2 m from front to back.
4. A thin rectangular plate of mass M, sides a and b is suspended from four vertical wires of the same length ℓ .
Determine the period of small oscillations of the plate when it is given a small horizontal displacement in a
xℓ
direction perpendicular to AB for a = b = ℓ . If your answer is T = 2 π fill value of x + y.
yg

5. At a smooth horizontal table are two identical cubes of mass m, connected by a spring of rigidity k. The length
of spring in the unstretched state is ℓ0. The right cube is linked to the load mass m at the end. At some time the
system is released and the system moves without initial velocity. Find the maximum distance (in cm) between
blocks during the motion of the system. [ℓ0 = 1 cm, m = 3 kg, k = 1000 N/m]

(8)
 GUIDED REVISION

6. A cart consists of a body of mass m and two wheels, each of mass m and radius R. The cart is attached to a
spring of constant k. The other end of the spring is fixed to a wall as shown in figure. If time period of
m
oscillation is β × 2 π then find the value of β
k

SECTION-IV : (Maximum
(Maximum Marks: 4)
4)
Matrix
atrix Match Type (4 × 5) (One or more options correct) 1 Q. [8 M; (for each entry +2(0
+2(0)]
+
1. Column-I represents potential energy graph for certain system. Column-II gives statements related to graphs.
Column-I Column-II
(A) (P) If total energy is E3, it is not possible for the body to have any
turning point in its motion.

(B) (Q) For a small displacement about point O potential energy function

Rankers Academy JEE

is quadratic in variable plotted on x-axis.

(C) (R) For a small displacement about position O motion is simple

harmonic.

(D) (S) If total energy is Etotal < E2 particle executes periodic and
oscillatory motion for all energy values greater than energy at O.

(T) Point O is position of stable equilibrium

(9)
 GUIDED REVISION

PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4
SECTION-I (i)
A. D A B C
Q. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A. A,B A,B,D B,C A,B,D B,C,D A,B,C C,D A,D A,B A,D
SECTION-I (ii)
Q. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A. A,B A,B,C,D A,C A,B,C,D B,D B,C A,B,C,D A,D A,C A,D
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6
SECTION-II
A. 26.00 3 1 2 3 2
Q. 1
SECTION-IV
A. A->PQRT,B->PQRST,C->P,D->PRST

Rankers Academy JEE

(10)
Rankers Academy JEE

(11)
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_Geometrical Optics-1
SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:33)
Single Correct Answer Type 11 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. The apparent depth of water in cylindrical water tank of diameter 2R cm is reducing at the rate of x cm/minute
when water is being drained out at a constant rate. The amount of water drained in c.c. per minute is (n1 =
refractive index of air, n2 = refractive index of water) :-
(A) x π R2 n1/n2 (B) x π R2 n2/n1 (C) 2 π R n1/n2 (D) π R2x
2. A light ray incident along vector 2i^ + 4j^ + 5k^ strikes on the x-z plane from medium-I of refractive index 2
√

and enters intomedium-II of refractive index µ2. The value of µ2 for which the ray is just totally reflected from
the boundary, is
(A) 5 (B) 6 (C) 3√ 3 (D) 8
4 5 5
3. You are given a parabolic mirror whose inner surface is silvered. The equation of the curve formed by its
intersection with x – y plane is given by y= x2/4. A ray travelling in x – y plane along line y= x+3 hits the mirror
in second quadrant and gets reflected. The unit vector in the direction of reflected ray is :-

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) 1 ^ ^ (B) 1 ^ ^ (C) 1 ^ ^
(−i − j ) i + j)
( (−i + j ) (D) None of these
√ 2 √ 2 √ 2
4. 1
The intensity of light from a source decreases with the distance x from the source, as 2 . In the following
x
picture, the intensity of light from the source S at point A on a curtain is 8.1 U, where U is some unit. We then
add a big mirror parallel to the curtain at point B. The distances AS and SB are equal, and the points A, S and
B are in line, perpendicular to the curtain and the mirror. What is the intensity in U of light reaching point A
now ?

(A) 9 (B) 15 (C) 12 (D) 18

PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-1 (1) E-1/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

5. The diagram shows a mirror system. If after two reflections the image and the object O coincide with each
other, then the value of radius of curvature of the concave mirror is : (Take a = 3m)

(A) 4 m (B) 6 m (C) 8 m (D) 10 m

6. ∣ 6 ∣
Radius of curvature of a concave mirror varies as R = ∣ ∣ cm. Initially the object was at a distance
∣ t2 − 5t + 6 ∣
100 cm from the pole as shown. At t = 0 the object started moving with velocity v = 2ti^ (cm/s). Find the speed
of image at time t = 3 sec. Mirror is moving with constant velocity −3i^ .
( )

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) 12 cm/s (B) 20 cm/s (C) 5 cm/s (D) 24 cm/s
7. A converging beam of light having angle of convergence 4° is incident upon a convex mirror as shown. Find
the angle of convergence after reflection. Focal length of mirror is 10 cm.

(A) 0.5° (B) 1° (C) 1.5° (D) 2°

8. A ray of light is incident on a concave mirror. It is parallel to the principal axis and its height from principal
axis is equal to the focal length of the mirror. The ratio of the distance of point B to the distance of the focus
from the centre of curvature is (AB is the reflected ray) :-

(A) 2 (B) √3 (C) 2 (D) 1

√3 2 3 2

E-2/8 (2) PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-1

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

9. A person has D cm wide face and his two eyes are separated by d cm. The minimum width of a mirror required
for the person to view his complete face is
(A) D+d (B) D−d (C) D+d (D) D−d
2 4 4 2
10. Find the co-ordinates of image of point object P formed after two successive reflection in situation as shown in
figure considering first reflection at concave mirror and then at convex.

(A) 60 cm , – 16 mm (B) 30 cm , – 14 mm
(C) 30 cm , – 16 mm (D) 60 cm , – 14 mm
11. The x-y plane is the boundary between two transparent media. Medium-1 with z > 0 has refractive index √2
and medium – 2 with z < 0 has a refractive index √3. A ray of light in medium – 1 given by the vector
^ ^ ^
A = 6 3i + 8 3j − 10k is incident on the plane of separation. Find the unit vector in the direction of refracted
√ √

Rankers Academy JEE

ray in medium-2.
(A) 1 ^ ^ ^ (B) 1 ^ ^ ^ (C) 1 ^ ^ ^ (D) 1 ^ ^ ^
(i − j − k) i + j + k)
( (3i + 4j + 5k) (3i + 4j − 5k)
√ 3 √ 3 5√ 2 5√ 2
SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 32)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 8 Q. [4 M (–2)]
12. Two mirror's are inclined at an angle of 30° one of the ray is incident parallel to the one of the mirror. Then
select the correct statement(s)-
(A) Ray will undergo five reflections from the system
(B) Total deviation from the system will 120°
(C) Ray will retrace it path finally
(D) Total deviation suffered by the ray will be 90°
13. A ray of light travelling in the direction 1 ^ ^
(3i + 4j ) is incident on a plane mirror. After reflection, it travel
5
1 ^ ^
along the direction (3i − 4j ). Then choose the correct statement(s).
5
(A) Mirror is kept in x-y plane (B) Normal of the mirror is along −j^
(C) Angle of incidence is 37° (D) Mirror is kept in x-z plane

PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-1 (3) E-3/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

14. A convex mirror and a concave mirror are placed on the same optic axis, separated by distance L = 20cm. The
radius of curvature of each mirror has a magnitude of 12 cm. A light source is located at a distance x from the
concave mirror as shown in figure.

(A) The rays from the source return to the source after reflecting first from the convex mirror and then
from the concave mirror for x = 8 cm.
(B) The rays from the source return to the source after reflecting first from the convex mirror and then
from the concave mirror for x = 16 cm.
(C) If the rays from the source return to the source after first reflecting from the concave mirror and
then from the convex mirror for x = 8 cm.
(D) If the rays from the source return to the source after first reflecting from the concave mirror and
then from the convex mirror for x = 16 cm.
15. Following are graphs of angle of deivation versus angle of incidence.

(a) (b) (c)

Rankers Academy JEE

Based on the above graphs mark the correct options.
(A) Graph-a may be a part of the graph for ray of light that travels from denser to rarer medium.
(B) Graph-b may be for ray of light that is totally internally reflected from a denser to rarer medium boundary.
(C) Graph-c may be a part of the graph for ray of light that travels from rarer to denser medium.
(D) Graph-b may be a part of the graph for ray of light that is reflected from a plane mirror.
16. A light ray incident in a medium of refractive index 4 is shown in diagram. Interface seperating the two
3
mediums lies in xz plane. Vector along incident ray is 3i − 4j^.
^

(A) Angle of incidence is 37°.

(B) The angle of refraction is 60º.
(C) The angle of refraction is 30°
(D) If angle of incidence of the incident ray is greater than the critical angle then total internal reflection
takes place.

E-4/8 (4) PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-1

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

17. In the diagram shown, light is incident on the interface between media 1 (refractive index n1) and 2 (refractive
index n2) at angle slightly greater than the critical angle, and is totally reflected. The light is then also totally
reflected at the interface between media 1 and 3 (refractive index n3), after which it travels in a direction
opposite to its initial direction. The media must have a refractive indices such that

(A) n1 < n2 < n3 (B) n21 − n23 > n22 (C) n21 − n22 < n23 (D) n21 + n22 > n23

18. For a concave mirror, graph of square of magnification and image distance from pole is given for real object.
Choose the correct statement(s).

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) This graph is hyperbola.
(C) radius of concave mirror is 60 cm
(B) length a must be equal to length b.
(D) the length c will be half of length a.
19. Light is incident from glass to air. The variation of the angle of deviation d with the angle of incident i for 0 <
i < 90° is shown. The values of x,y and z, in terms of critical angle C, shown in the figure are

(A) x = C (B) y = 90º – C (C) z = 180º – 2C (D) z = 180° – C

PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-1 (5) E-5/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-II : (Maximum Marks: 28)
Numerical-Answer-Type questions (Non Negative Integer) 7 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. A thin plate of transparent plastic is embedded in a thick slab of glass. The index of refraction of the glass is n
= 1.50 ; the index of refraction of the plate changes as shown in the diagram. A beam of light passes through
glass and strikes the surface of the plastic plate. The maximum angle of incidence θ max enables the beam to
pass through the plate. Find θ max (in °).

2. A ray of light is falling on a glass sphere of μ = √ 3 such that the incident ray and the emergent ray, when
produced, intersect at a point on the surface of the sphere. The angle of incidence in degrees is found to be 2 π .

Rankers Academy JEE

k
Find the value of k.

3. In direction of y, medium become denser as μ = 1 + y2 above x – axis. A light ray enters at an angle almost at
90° at origin. At what value of y, the slope of path of light is 3.
√

E-6/8 (6) PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-1

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

4. In the mid-19th century, French physicist Foucault made the most accurate measurement of the speed of light
using a laboratory-sized apparatus consisting of rotating and fixed mirrors. Consider a source of light emitting
a beam which bounces off a rotating mirror and then reflects off a small fixed mirror. By the time it reaches
back to the rotating mirror, the mirror has rotated by a small angle. This rotation will deflect the beam through
a small angle 30 minute of an arc from its original path. If the mirror rotates with a frequency f ( (5/3) x 104 Hz
) and the speed of light is given as 3 × 108 m/sec , the value of D (where D is distance between rotating mirror
5
and fixed mirror) is α m then the value of a is
4

5. A long rectangular slab of transparent medium of thickness d is placed on table with length parallel to x-axis
and width parallel to the y-axis. A ray of light travelling along y-axis enters at origin such that angle of
incidence θ ( θ → 90°). The refractive index µ of the medium varies as μ = 1 + ex/d . The refractive index of
√

the air is 1. If the x-coordinate of the point A, where the ray intersects the upper surface of the slab-air

Rankers Academy JEE

boundary is (kd) ℓ n2, then find the value of k.

6. An object of length 30 cm is placed on principal axis of a concave mirror of focal length 30 cm. Its one end at
a distance of 45 cm as shown. If length of image is 10x (in cm) find the value of x.

PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-1 (7) E-7/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

7. The principal axis of a spherical mirror is shown by dotted line. O is the point object whose real image is I.
The distance of the pole and centre of curvature of the mirror from object measured along principal axis by
drawing ray diagram is x & y cm, then find x/y.

SECTION-IV : (Maximum Marks: 8)

Matrix Match Type (4 × 5) (One or more options correct) 1 Q. [8 M; (for each entry +2(0)]
1. A bird in air is diving vertically over a tank with speed 6 cm/s. Base of the tank is silvered. A fish in the tank is
rising upward along the same line with speed 4 cm/s. [Take : μ water = 4/3]

Rankers Academy JEE

Column I Column II
(A) Speed of the image of fish as seen by the bird directly (P) 12
(B) Speed of the image of fish formed after reflection from the mirror as seen by the bird (Q) 4
(C) Speed of image of bird relative to the fish looking upwards (R) 9
(D) Speed of image of bird relative to the fish looking downwards in the mirror (S) 3

E-8/8 (8) PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-1

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
ANSWER KEY GR_Geometrical Optics-1
PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A. B B A A C A D A D B
SECTION-I (i)
Q. 11
A. D

Q. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
SECTION-I (ii)
A. A,C B,C,D A,C A,B,D A,C B,D B,C A,B,C
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SECTION-II
A. 53 6 1 5 2 4 3
Q. 1
SECTION-IV
A. A->R,B->S,C->P,D->Q

Rankers Academy JEE

(9)
Rankers Academy JEE

(10)
Rankers Academy JEE

(11)
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_Geometrical Optics-2
SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:12)
Single Correct Answer Type 4 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. A light ray is incident on face AB of prism ABC as shown in figure. The second prism is kept in such a
manner that emergent ray from prism ABC is falling normally on face A'B' of prism A'B'C'. The net deviation
produced by the optical system of the two prisms is :-

(A) 48° (B) 112° (C) 32° (D) 18°

Rankers Academy JEE

2. Figure shows a thin converging lens for which the focal length is 5 cm. The lens is in front of a concave
spherical mirror of radius R = 30 cm. If the lens and mirror are 20 cm apart and an object is placed 15 cm to
the left of the lens, determine the approximate distance of the final image from the lens (in cm)

(A) 5.3 cm (B) 4.6 cm (C) 6.1 cm (D) 12.7 cm

PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-2 (1) E-1/11

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

3. A thin plano-convex glass lens (µ = 1.5) has its plane surface reflecting and R is the radius of curvature of
curved part, then which of the following ray diagram is true for an object placed at O?
(A) (B)

(D)
(C)

Rankers Academy JEE

4. A parallel beam of light is incident from air at an angle α on the side PQ of a right angled triangular prism of
refractive index n = 2. Light undergoes total internal reflection in the prism at the face PR when α has a
√

minimum value of 45°. The angle θ of the prism is :

(A) 15° (B) 22.5° (C) 30° (D) 45°

E-2/11 (2) PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-2

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 52)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 13 Q. [4 M (–2)]
5. The angle of deviation ( δ ) vs angle of incidence (i) is plotted for a prism.
Choose the correct statement(s).

(A) The angle of prism is 60°

(B) The refractive index of the prism is n = √3
(C) For deviation to be 65° the angle of incidence i1 = 55°
(D) for minimum deviation, the angle of emergence e = 60°.
6. A concave spherical surface of radius of curvature 10 cm separates two mediums X and Y of refractive indices
4/3 and 3/2 respectively. Centre of curvature of the surface lies in the medium X. An object is placed in

Rankers Academy JEE

medium X. Choose incorrect option(s) :-

(A) Image is always real

(B) Image is real if the object distance is greater than 90 cm.
(C) Image is always virtual
(D) Image is virtual only if the object distance is less than 90 cm.
7. The principal axis of an optical device is along y = – 1. If the image of a small body placed at ( – 30,3) is
formed at a point (60, – 3), then the optical device may be :-
(A) A convex lens of focal length 20 cm
(B) A concave mirror of focal length 60 cm
(C) A concave lens of focal length 20 cm
(D) A convex mirror of focal length 60 cm

PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-2 (3) E-3/11

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

8. In displacement method, the distance between object and the screen is 96 cm. The ratio of length of two
images formed by a converging lens placed between them is 4. Then
(A) ratio of the length of object to the length of shorter image is 2.
(B) ratio of the length of object to the length of shorter image is 2.
(C) focal length of the lens is 64/3 cm.
(D) when the shorter image is formed on screen, distance of the lens from the screen is 32 cm.
9. A beam of light converges to a point P. A device L is placed in the path of the convergent beam 12 cm from P
as shown. Choose the correct option(s) :-

(A) If L is a convex lens of focal length 20 cm, the beam converges at a point at 4.5 cm distance from P
(B) If L is a convex lens of focal length 20 cm, the beam converges at a point at 10 cm distance from lens
(C) If L is a concave lens of focal length 16 cm, the beam converges at a point at 48 cm distance from lens

Rankers Academy JEE

(D) If L is a plane mirror the beam converges at a point at 24 cm distance from P.
10. Variation of magnification (m) produced by a thin converging lens versus distance (v) of image from pole of
the lens is plotted. Which of the following statements is/are correct?
(A) Focal length of the lens is equal to intercept on v-axis.
(B) Focal length of the lens is equal to inverse of the magnitude slope of the line.
(C) Magnitude of intercept on m-axis is equal to unity.
(D) Magnitude of intercept on v-axis is equal to unity.
11. The radius of curvature of the left and right surface of the concave lens are 10cm and 15cm respectively. The
radius of curvature of the mirror is 15cm.

(A) equivalent focal length of the combination is – 18cm.

(B) equivalent focal length of the combination is +36cm.
(C) the system behaves like a concave mirror.
(D) the system behaves like a convex mirror.
E-4/11 (4) PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-2
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

12. A spherical transparent medium of refractive index n is placed in air. A thin parallel beam of light of
monochromatic wavelength l is incident at a point O of the sphere at an angle of incidence i. Then which of the
following statements will be true for this optic system?

(A) For the ray to come out of the sphere after refraction through it, the incident angle i should be less
than the critical angle C for the medium of the sphere.
(B) The angle of emergence q ( made with the normal) for the ray will be equal to the incident angle i
for all values of i.
(C) If angle i ≃ 90∘ (grazing incidence) the emergent ray will come out grazing the surface.
(D) If the angle of incidence i is such that the angle of refraction at O is equal to the critical angle C for
the medium of sphere, the emergent ray will be parallel to the incident ray.
13. A prism of refractive index √2 and apex angle A is shown. Light is incident from PQ side at angle of incidence

Rankers Academy JEE

i (0 < i ≤ 90°)

(A) if A = 40° then light incident at all angles will emerge from surface PR.
(B) if A = 80° then light incident at some angles will emerge from surface PR and at some other angles
light will suffer TIR at surface PR.
(C) if A = 100° then light incident at all angles will be reflected back from surface PR.
(D) whatever is the value of A, light will emerge from the surface PR for some value of i.
14. Optical axis of a thin equi-convex lens is the X-axis. The co-ordinate of a point object and its image are ( – 20
cm, 1 cm) and (25 cm, – 2 cm) respectively
(A) the lens is located at x = 5 cm
(B) the lens is located at x = – 5 cm
(C) the focal length of the lens is 10 cm
(D) the focal length of the lens is 15 cm
PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-2 (5) E-5/11
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

15. A rectangular cavity ABCD is carved inside an equilateral prism PQR of refractive index 2shown in the √

figure. For a ray entering at face PQ and emerging at face PR, without passing through AB and CD :

(A) there will not be any effect of cavity on δ (B) there may be effect of cavity on δ
(C) for cavity filled with water δ min = 30º (D) for cavity filled with air δ min = 30º
16. The diagram shows an equilateral prism. The medium on one side of the prism is μ 1. The refractive index of
the prism is μ = 4/ 3. The diagram shows the variation of the magnitude of angle of deviation with respect to
√

μ 1? Consider the light ray to be normally incident on the first face. Then :-

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) The value of β 1 is 60°.

(C) The value of k1 is 2.

(B) The value of β 2 is 30°.
(D) The value of k is
2
4
.
√ 3
17. A thin right angled glass prism of cross-section ABC with a very small refracting angle α = 3.6° is placed
between the convex lenses along a common axis O1O2 (as shown in figure)

The lenses are placed at equal distances l = 30 cm from the prism. The refractive index of the prism glass is μ
= 1.5. The surface AB does not reflect any light energy while the surface AC is partially reflecting and
partially refracting. A point source of light S is placed at a distance of 20 cm to the left of the lens L1 as shown.
Considering the rays that are closed to the axis O1O2, The focal lengths of the lenses L1 and L2 are 20 cm each.
The face AB of the prism is normal to the axis O1O2.
(A) The number of the images(s) formed by this system are 2.
(B) The position of one of the image formed by this system from principle axis is π cm.
5
(C) The position of one of the image formed by this system from principle axis is 1.2 π cm.
(D) The number of the image formed by this system is 1.
E-6/11 (6) PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-2
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-II : (Maximum Marks: 16)
Numerical-Answer-Type questions (Non Negative Integer) 4 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. A hollow sphere of glass of R.I. n has a small mark M on its interior surface which is observed by an observer
O from a point outside the sphere. C is the centre of the sphere. The inner cavity (air) is concentric with the
external surface and thickness of the glass is every where equal to the radius of the inner surface. The distance
(n − 1)R
by which the mark will appear nearer than is . Find p. (assuming paraxial rays.)
(pn − 1)

2. A point object is placed at a distance of 0.3m from a convex lens (focal length 0.2 m ) cut into two halves each
of which is displaced by 0.0005 m as shown in the figure. If number of images are x and the distance between
them is y mm, then find xy.

3.
Rankers Academy JEE
A diverging lens of focal length 10 cm is placed 10 cm in front of a plane mirror as shown in the figure. Light
from a very far away source falls on the lens. Find the distance (in cm) of the image of source due to plane
mirror (before hitting lens again) from mirror?

4. A convex lens of focal length 15 cm and a concave mirror of focal length 30 cm are kept with their optic axes
PQ and RS parallel but separated in vertical direction by 0.6 cm as shown. The distance between the lens and
mirror is 30 cm. An upright object AB of height 1.2 cm is placed on the optic axis PQ of the lens at a distance
of 20 cm from the lens . If A' B' is the image after refraction from the lens and reflection from the mirror, find
the distance of A'B' (in cm) from the pole of the mirror.

PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-2 (7) E-7/11

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-III : (Maximum Marks: 16)
Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 4 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. A hollow glass sphere of inner radius 5 cm & outer radius 10 cm is viewed as shown in figure. If refractive
index of glass is 3/2, find distance (in cm) between A & O as seen by the observer?

2. Radii of curvature of a concavo-convex lens (refractive index = 1.5) are 40 cm and 20 cm as shown. The
convex side is silvered. The distance x (in cm) on the principal axis where an object is placed so that its image
is created on the object itself, is given as 4 β . Find the value of β .

3.
Rankers Academy JEE 4 7
Water (with refractive index = ) in a tank is 18 cm deep. Oil of refractive index lies on water making a
3 4
convex surface of radius of curvature ‘R = 6 cm’ as shown. Consider oil to act as a thin lens. An object ‘S’ is
placed 24 cm above water surface. The location of its image is at ‘x’ cm above the bottom of the tank. Then ‘x’ is

4. A monochromatic beam of light is incident at 60° on one face of an equilateral prism of refractive index n and
emerges from the opposite face making an angle θ (n) with the normal (see the figure). For n = 3 the value of
√

dθ
θ is 60° and = m. The value of m is
dn

E-8/11 (8) PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-2

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-IV : (Maximum Marks: 24)
Matrix Match Type (4 × 5) (One or more options correct) 3 Q. [8 M; (for each entry +2(0)]
1. 3 4
Consider an equilateral prism ABC of glass μ =
( ) placed in water ( μ = )
2 3

Column – I Column – II
(A) FG is parallel to BC (P) maximum deviation
(B) i1 = 90° (Q) minimum deviation
9
(C) i1 = i2 = sin –1

Rankers Academy JEE

( ) (R) TIR will take place at surface AC
16
(D) EF is perpendicular to AB (S) No TIR will take place at surface BC
(T) Can't say anything

PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-2 (9) E-9/11

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

2. Column I (optical system) Column II (focal length)

(A) (P) 80 cm

(B) (Q) 40 cm

Rankers Academy JEE

(C) (R) 30 cm

(D) (S) 20 cm

E-10/11 (10) PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-2

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

3. In column Ι certain combination of small object and image are given. Match them with possible refracting /
reflecting body in column ΙΙ. In all cases, object is perpendicular to x-axis. Object can’t be at zero distance
from the interface.

Column I Column II

(A) Virtual image of virtual object (P)

Light is incident from air on the spherical surface

(B) Real image of real object (Q)

Rankers Academy JEE

(C) Erect real image of same size as object (R)

Light is incident from right to left.

(D) Erect and virtual image of larger size (S)

(T)

PHYSICS/ GR_Geometrical Optics-2 (11) E-11/11

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
ANSWER KEY GR_Geometrical Optics-2
PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4
SECTION-I (i)
A. A A A A
Q. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A. A,B,C,D A,B,D A,B A,B,C,D B,D A,B,C A,C B,C A,B,C B,C
SECTION-I (ii)
Q. 15 16 17
A. A,C,D A,B,C,D A,B,C
Q. 1 2 3 4
SECTION-II
A. 3 6 20 15
Q. 1 2 3 4
SECTION-III
A. 6 4 2 2
Q. 1 2 3
SECTION-IV
A. A->QS,B->PS,C->QS,D->S A->S,B->P,C->R,D->Q A->PRST,B->PQ,C->S,D->PQ

Rankers Academy JEE

(12)
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-1
SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:30)
Single Correct Answer Type 10 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. A ring of radius R is made out of a thin wire of area of cross section A. The ring has a uniform charge Q
distributed on it. A charge q0 is placed at the centre of the ring. If Y is the young’s modulus for the material of
the ring and Δ R is the change in the radius of the ring then,
(A) Δ R = q0 Q (B) Δ R = q0 Q (C) Δ R = q0 Q (D) Δ R = q0 Q
4 π ε 0 RAY 4 π ε 0 RAY
2 8 π 2 ε 20 RAY 8 π ε 0 RAY
2

2. The electrostatic potential V at a point on the circumference of a thin non – conducting disk of radius r and
uniform charge density σ is given by equation V = 4 σ r. Which of the following expression correctly
represents electrostatic energy stored in the electric field of a similar charged disk of radius R?
(A) 8 (B) 4 (C) 2 (D) None of these
U= π σ 2 R3 U= π σ 2 R3 U= π σ 2 R3
3 3 3
3. Two smooth spherical non conducting shells each of radius R having uniformly distributed charge Q and – Q
on their surfaces are released on a smooth non-conducting surface when the distance between their centres is
5R. The mass of A is m and that of B is 2m. The speed of A just before A and B collide is :- [Neglect
1
gravitational interaction] K=

Rankers Academy JEE

( )
4π ε0

(A) 2KQ2 (B) 4KQ2 (C) 8KQ2 (D) 16KQ2

√ √ √ √

5mR 5mR 5mR 5mR

4. Volume charge density of a non – conducting sphere is varying as ρ = ρ 0r where r0 is a constant and r is the
distance from centre of [Link] potential at r=2R is zero then potential at infinity will be

(A) ρ 0 R3 (B) ρ 0 R3 (C) ρ 0 R3 (D) Data insufficient

− −
8∈0 8∈0 4∈0

PHYSICS/ GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-1 E-1/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

5. In a certain region of space, the potential field depends on x and y coordinates as V = (x2 – y2). The
corresponding electric field lines in x-y plane are correctly represented by :
(B) (C)
(A) (D)

6. An electric field E→ = E0 ^i + E0 j^ exists in a space. Find the flux through a triangular loop with vertices at
a a a a
( , 0, 0 , , 0, a and
) ( ) ( , a, )
2 2 2 2
(A) 2 E0 a2 (B) E0 a 2 (C) √ 3 (D) √3
√
E0 a 2 E0 a 2
2 2 4
7. The acceleration due to gravity on the surface of earth is g & radius R. A ball is projected horizontally from
point P1on the surface of earth (as shown in the figure) If the maximum height attained by the ball above the
earth surface is 3R then speed of projection V0 is (neglect cosmic dust resistance & earth rotation about its
axis)

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) 8 (D) 6
√ gR (B) √ 2gR (C) √ gR √ gR
5 5
8. A frictionless tunnel is dug along a chord of the earth at a perpendicular distance R from the centre of earth
2
(where R is radius of earth). An object is released from one end of the tunnel. The correct graph, showing the
variation of acceleration of particle with its distance r from centre of earth is :
(A) (B) (C) (D)

9. A satellite of mass m is orbiting a planet of mass M at a radial distance r0 from the centre of the planet. The
satellite expels a small mass in a direction opposite to its orbital velocity. The immediate recoil velocity of the
satellite exceeds the initial orbital velocity by Δ v. The largest possible value of Δ v for which the satellite
remains within the gravitational field of the planet is
(A) 2GM (B) GM (C) GM (D) None of these
√ √ (√ 2 − 1) √
r0 2r0 r0

E-2/8 PHYSICS/ GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-1

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

10. With what minimum speed should m be projected from point P in presence of two fixed spherical masses M
each at A and B is shown in figure such that mass m should escape the gravitational attraction of A and B.
(A) 6 √ GM (B) 8 √ GM (C) 2GM (D) GM
√
2√
5 a 5 a a a
SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 32)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 8 Q. [4 M (–2)]
11. Electric field in a region is given as E→ = (10 − 5x) i^. A charge particle of mass 5kg and charge Q (= 1C) is
situated at origin and free to move in given electric field. Then choose the correct options (Neglect gravity) :-
(A) Motion of charge particle is Oscillatory
(B) Maximum displacement of charge particle from origin is 4 SI units
(C) Maximum velocity gain by charge particle is 2 SI units
(D) The position of charge particle, when velocity gained by particle is maximum, is 2 SI units
12. A stationary electric dipole →ϕ = pk^ is situated at origin. A positive charge q, mass m executes circular motion
of radius s at constant speed in the field of the dipole. Characterize the plane of orbit is :-
(A) 1 2qp

Rankers Academy JEE

The speed of charge particle is v = √
s √ 3 π ∈ 0m
(B) 1 qp
The speed of charge particle is v = √
s 3√3 π ∈ 0 m
(C) 2qpm
Angular momentum of charge is L = √
√ 3π ∈0
(D) qpm
Angular momentum of charge is L = √
3√3 π ∈ 0
13. Figure shows two dipole moments parallel to each other and placed at a distance x apart x is very large, then :

(A) they will repel each other (B) they will attract each other
(C) force of interaction is of magnitude of 3P1 P2 (D) force of interaction is of magnitude of 6P1 P2
4 π ε 0 x4 4 π ε 0 x4

PHYSICS/ GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-1 E-3/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

14. Two conducting spheres of radii R and 3R carry charges Q and – 2Q. Between these spheres a neutral
conducting sphere of radius 2R is connected. The separation between the sphere is considerably large then :-

(A) The final charge on initially neutral conducting sphere is − Q

3
(B) 35KQ2
The decrease in electric potential energy of sphere of radius R is
72R
(C) 37KQ2
The decrease in electric potential energy of sphere of radius R is
72R
(D) The final electric potential of sphere of radius 3R will be − KQ
6R
15. Two point objects of masses m and 4m are at rest at an infinite separation. They move towards each other
under mutual gravitational attraction. If G is the universal gravitational constant, then at a separation r
(A) the total mechanical energy of the two objects is zero

Rankers Academy JEE

(B) 10Gm
their relative velocity is √

r
(C) the total kinetic energy of the objects is 4Gm2
r
(D) their relative velocity is zero
16. A particle is dropped from a height equal to the radius of the earth above the tunnel dug through the earth as
shown in the figure.
R : Radius of earth.
M : Mass of earth

(A) Particle will oscillate through the earth to a height R on both sides
(B) Particle will execute simple harmonic motion
(C) Motion of the particle is periodic
(D) 2GM
Particle passes the centre of earth with a speed = √

E-4/8 PHYSICS/ GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-1

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

17. Two spherical bodies of masses M and 2M and radii R and 2R, respectively, start approaching each other at
time t = 0 from rest, due to mutual gravitational attraction. They were initially very far away from each other.
They collide at time t = T.
(A) Distance travelled by their COM till time t = T is zero (COM – centre of mass)
(B) 1 √ 2GM
Their relative velocity at time t = T is
3 R
(C) PE of the system decreases as the bodies approach each other
(D) In COM frame, speeds of the bodies are always equal
18. A particle at a distance r from the centre of a uniform spherical planet of mass M radius R (< r) has a velocity
of magnitude v.
(A) GM
for 0 < v < √
trajectory may be ellipse
r
(B) GM
for v = √
trajectory may be ellipse
r
(C) GM 2GM
for √ <v<√ trajectory may be ellipse.
r r
(D) GM

Rankers Academy JEE

for v = √
trajectory may be circle
r
SECTION-I (iii) : (Maximum Marks: 3)
Matching list Type (Single Option Correct) 1 Q. [3 M (–1)]
19. A planet of mass M, has two natural satellites with masses m1 and m2. The radii of their circular orbits are R1
and R2 respectively. Ignore the gravitational force between the satellites. Define v1, L1, K1 and T1 to be,
respectively, the orbital speed, angular momentum, kinetic energy and time period of revolution of satellite 1 ;
and v2, L2, K2 and T2 to be the corresponding quantities of satellite 2. Given m1/m2 = 2 and R1/R2 = 1/4, match
the ratios in List-I to the numbers in List-II.
List-I List-II
(P) νν 1 (1) 1
2 8
L1
(Q) (2) 1
L2
K1
(R) (3) 2
K2
T1
(S) (4) 8
T2
(A) P → 4 ; Q → 2 ; R → 1 ; S → 3 (B) P → 3 ; Q → 2 ; R → 4 ; S → 1
(C) P → 2 ; Q → 3 ; R → 1 ; S → 4 (D) P → 2 ; Q → 3 ; R → 4 ; S →1

PHYSICS/ GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-1 E-5/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-II : (Maximum Marks: 8)
Numerical-Answer-Type questions (Non Negative Integer) 2 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. A cone made of insulating material has a total charge Q = 3mC spread uniformly over its sloping surface.
Calculate the energy (in Joule) required to take a charge q = 5µC from infinity to apex A of cone. (Given : half
cone angle θ = 37°, R = 2m)

2. The figure shows a conducting sphere 'A' of radius 'a' which is surrounded by a neutral conducting spherical
shell B of radius 'b' (>a). Initially switches S1, S2 and S3 are open and sphere 'A' carries a charge Q. First the
switch 'S1' is closed to connect the shell B with the ground and then opened. Now the switch 'S2' is closed so
that the sphere 'A' is grounded and then S2 is opened. Finally, the switch 'S3' is closed to connect the spheres
together. Find the heat (in joule) which is produced after closing the switch S3. [Consider b = 4 cm, a = 2 cm
and Q = 80 μ C]

Rankers Academy JEE

SECTION-III : (Maximum Marks: 36)
Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 9 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. AB and CD are uniform line charges of infinite length having charge density λ 1 and λ 2 and lying parallel to the
Z – axis and X – axis respectively. The force between them depends on the perpendicular distance between them
given by 'r' as shown in figure. The value of F = λ 1 λ 2n , then write the value of n in OMR sheet.
2 ε 0r

E-6/8 PHYSICS/ GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-1

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

2. A uniformly charged sphere is placed inside a charged hollow sphere as shown in figure. O is the centre of
hollow sphere and C is the centre of solid sphere. The magnitude of charge on both the spheres is
3
4 (√ ) μ C. The electric field at point ‘P’ which lie just outside the hollow sphere is given by 3 α kN/C.
7
Find the value of α .

3. A uniformly charged hemisphere of radius b and charge density ρ has a hemispherical cavity of radius
b n ρ b2
a (a = ) cut from its centre. If the potential at the centre of the cavity is then n = ?
2 16 ∈ 0

Rankers Academy JEE

4. Three small dipoles of dipole moment P each are placed at the three vertices of an equilateral triangle of side a
n × 3√3kp 1
as shown. If total potential at the centroid G is given by V = . Find n ( k= .
)
2a2 4π ∈0

5. A small point charge (+q = 1µC, m = 3 kg) is started from a very long distance towards a fixed point charge
(+Q = 1 mC). The initial line of motion of q is at a ^ distance of d = 1m from the line passing from the centre
of Q, (as shown in figure). Take V0 = 2 m/s. Determine the least distance between the two point charges (in m)

6. The electric potential in a region is given by V(x, y, z) = ax2 + ay2 + abz2. ‘a’ is a positive constant of
appropriate dimensions and b, a positive constant such that V is volts when x, y, z are in m. Let b = 2. The
work done by the electric field when a point charge +4µC moves from the point (0, 0, 0.1m) to the origin is 50
µJ. The radius of the circle of the equipotential curve corresponding to V = 6250 volts and z = 2 m is α m. √

Fill α 2 in OMR sheet.

PHYSICS/ GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-1 E-7/8
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

7. The electric field strength depends only on the x, y and z coordinates according to the law E =
^ ^ ^
a(xi + yj + zk)
, where a = 122.5 SI unit and is a constant. Find the potential difference (in volt) between
(x2 + y 2 + z 2 )3/2
(3, 2, 6) and (0, 3, 4).
8. A particle of mass m was transferred from the centre of the base of a uniform hemisphere of mass M and
radius R into infinity. What work was performed in the process by the gravitational force exerted on the
−n GMm
particle by the hemisphere is , Then find the value of n :-
2 R
9. A binary star consists of two stars A (mass 2.2 MS) and B (mass 11 MS), where MS is the mass of the sun.
They are separated by distance d and are rotating about their centre of mass, which is stationary. The ratio of
the total angular momentum of the binary star to the angular momentum of star B about the centre of mass is:-

Rankers Academy JEE

ANSWER KEY GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-1

Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SECTION-I (i)
A. D A A B D B A D C D
Q. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
SECTION-I (ii)
A. A,B,C,D B,D A,C A,B,D A,B,C A,C,D A,C A,B,C,D
Q. 19
SECTION-I (iii)
A. B
Q. 1 2
SECTION-II
A. 81 180
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SECTION-III
A. 0 9 3 1 2 6 7 3 6

E-8/8 PHYSICS/ GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-1

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-2
SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:18)
Single Correct Answer Type 6 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. A positive point charge Q is placed at a point P, which is at a distance L from the centre 'C' of an uncharged
metallic ball of radius R (L > R). There is a point G on the line PC, at a distance R/2 from C. Then, the electric
potential at G is :-
(A) Q (B) Q 1 1
× ( − )
4 π ε 0L 4π ε0 L R
(C) Q 1 2
× ( − ) (D) None
4π ε0 L R
2. A rod containing charge +Q is brought near an initially uncharged isolated conducting rod as shown. Regions
with total surface charge +Q and – Q are induced in the conductor as shown in the figure. The only regions
where the net charge in this configuration is non – zero are indicated by the "+" and " – " signs. Let us denote the
total flux of electric field outward through closed surface S1 as ϕ 1, through S2 as ϕ 2, etc. Which of the
following is necessarily false.

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) ϕ 1 > 0 (B) ϕ 2 = ϕ 1 (C) ϕ 3 = ϕ 1 (D) ϕ 4 = 0
3. A sphere of radius R carries charge such that its volume charge density is proportional to the square of the
distance from the centre. What is the ratio of the magnitude of the electric field at a distance 2R from the
centre to the magnitude of the electric field at a distance of R/2 from the centre (i.e. Er=2R /Er=R/2 )?
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 8
4. An ellipsoidal cavity is carved within a perfect conductor. A positive charge q is placed at the center of the
cavity. The points A & B are on the cavity surface as shown in the figure. Then :

(A) electric field near A in the cavity = electric field near B in the cavity
(B) charge density at A = charge density at B
(C) potential at A = potential at B
(D) total electric field flux through the surface of the cavity is q/ ε 0.
PHYSICS/ GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-2 E-1/8
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

5. A small satellite of mass 'm' is revolving around earth in a circular orbit of radius r0 with speed v0. At certain
point of its orbit, the direction of motion of satellite is suddenly changed by angle θ = cos –1(3/5) by turning its
velocity vector in the same plane of motion, such that speed remains constant. The satellite, consequently goes
to elliptical orbit around earth. The ratio of speed at perigee to speed at apogee is :-
(A) 3 (B) 9 (C) 1/3 (D) 1/9
6. Given a thin homogeneous disc of radius a and mass m1. A particle of mass m2 is placed at a distance ℓ from
the disc on its axis of symmetry. Initially both are motionless in free space but they ultimately collide because
of gravitational attraction. Assuming a << ℓ , find the relative velocity at the time of collision.
(A) 1/2 (B) 1/2
2 1 2 1
[ 2G(m1 + m2 ) ( + )] [ 2G(m1 + m2 ) ( − )]
a ℓ a ℓ
(C) 1/2
2 1 (D) None of these
[G(m1 + m2 ) ( − )]
a ℓ
SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 56)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 14 Q. [4 M (–2)]
7. An infinite plane in the xz plane carries a uniform surface charge density σ 1 = 8.85 nC/m2. A second infinite
plane carrying a uniform charge density σ 2 = 17.7 nC/m2 intersects the xz plane at the z-axis and makes an

Rankers Academy JEE

angle of 60° with the xz plane as shown in figure. The electric field in the xy plane.

(A) at x = 6m, y = 2m is 500 √ 3 N/C (B) at x = – 5m, y = 0 is 500 √ 3 N/C

(D) at x = – 1m, y = – 1m is 500 √ 7 N/C

(C) at x = 2m, y = 6 m is 500 √ 7 N/C

8. → = xi^ + yj^ + zk^ exists in space then choose incorrect statement(s) :

E

(A) This electric field is not possible

(B) Volume charge density is non uniform.
(C) If a charge particle goes from (3, 4, 5) to (5, 3, 4) then work done by electric force on charge will be
positive
(D) Charge enclosed in sphere of unit radius and centered at origin is 4 π ∈ 0.
E-2/8 PHYSICS/ GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-2
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

9. The following figure shows a charge Q kept at the centre of a cube. Let ϕ represent the flux of field due to the
charge Q, the correct options are :-

(A) Q (B) Q (C) ϕ abcd = 0 (D) Q

ϕ ABCD = ϕ Cbpf = ϕ abcd =
6ε0 24 ε 0 2ε0
10. In a region of space, the electric field E→ = E0 xi^ + E0 yj^. Consider an imaginary cubical volume of edge ‘a’ with
its edges parallel to the axes of coordinates. Now,

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) the total electric flux through the faces 1 and 3 is E0a3
(B) the charge inside the cubical volume is 2 ε 0E0a3
(C) the total electric flux through the faces 2 and 4 is 2E0a3
(D) the charge inside the cubical volume is ε 0E0a3
11. A long thin straight wire with linear charge density λ runs along axis of a thin hollow metal cylinder of radius
R. The cylinder has a net linear charge density 2 λ . Assume λ is positive. Mark correct options:-
^
(A) → > R) = 3 λ r
E(r
2π ∈0 r
^
(B) → < R) = 3 λ r
E(r
2π ∈0 r
(C) Linear charge density on inner surface of cylinder is – λ
(D) Linear charge density on outer surface of cylinder is 3 λ

PHYSICS/ GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-2 E-3/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

12. For the situation shown in the figure below, mark out the correct statement(s).

(A) Potential of the conductor is q

.
4 π ε 0 (d + R)
(B) Potential of the conductor is q
.
4 π ε 0d
(C) Potential of the conductor can’t be determined as nature of distribution of induced charges is not
known.
(D) Potential at point B due to induced charges is −qR
.
4 π ε 0 (d + R)d
13. A spherical soap bubble of radius R has uniformly distributed charge over its surface with surface charge
density σ then [T = surface tension of the soap solution]
(A) excess pressure inside the bubble is 4T σ2 (B) excess pressure inside the bubble is 4T σ2
− +
R 2ε0 R 2ε0

Rankers Academy JEE

(C) excess pressure inside the bubble is 4T
R
(D) electrostatic pressure is σ 2
2ε0
14. In which of the cases we will get uniform charge distribution of (+q) on external spherical surface. Given every
object is a conductor :
(A)
thin shell having net charge +q

(B)
thick shell having net charge zero

(C)
thick shell having net charge zero

(D)
solid sphere having net charge +q

E-4/8 PHYSICS/ GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-2

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

15. An insulating ring of charge 2 π λ b, radius b is concentric with a charged conducting solid sphere of charge Q
and radius a (b > a) as shown in the figure. Then :-

(A) Potential of the sphere is Q λ

+
4 π ∈ 0a 2 ∈ 0
(B) If sphere is grounded then charge on the sphere will be −a λ
8π 2 ∈0
(C) Electric field inside the sphere is non-zero
(D) The sphere is equipotential body.
16. Two large thin conducting plates with small gap in between are placed in a uniform electric field E
(perpendicular to the plates). Area of each plate is A and charges +Q and – Q are given to these plates as
shown in the figure. If points R,S and T as shown in the figure are three points in space, then the

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) field at point R is E (B) field at point S is E
(C) field at point T is Q (D) field at point S is Q
( E+ ) ( E+ )
ε oA Aεo
17. Two tunnels are dug from one side of the earth's surface to the other side, first along a diameter and the second
along a chord. Now two particles are dropped from one end of each of the tunnels. Both the particles oscillate
simple harmonically along the tunnels. Let T1 and T2 be the time period v1 and v2 be the maximum speed of
the particle in the two tunnels. Then
(A) T1 = T2 (B) T1 > T2 (C) v1 = v2 (D) v1 > v2
18. Satellite A is in a circular orbit of radius r and satellite B in another circular orbit of radius 4r, both revolving
around the earth. The masses of the satellites A and B are in the ratio 3 : 1. If the symbols V, E, u and T
represent the speed, total energy, escape velocity and period of revolution of satellite, then
(A) VA/VB = 2 (B) EA/EB = 12 (C) uA/uB = 2 (D) T /T = 1
A B
8

PHYSICS/ GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-2 E-5/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

19. A particle of mass m is thrown in a parabolic path towards earth having mass M and radius R. It comes to a
greatest approach distance R/2 from surface of earth. Magnitude of total energy change required to make the
particle moving in an elliptical path having eccentricity 1/2, with the greatest approach point either aphelion or
perihelion are :
(A) 1 GMm (B) 1 GMm (C) 1 GMm (D) GMm
3 R 6 R 2 R R
20. A small body of mass m is projected with a velocity just sufficient to make it reach from the surface of a planet
(of radius 2R and mass 3M) to the surface of another planet (of radius R and mass M). The distance between
the centers of the two spherical planets is 6R. The distance of the body from the center of bigger planet is ‘x’ at
any moment. During the journey, find the distance x where the speed of the body is maximum & minimum.
Assume motion of body along the line joining centres of planets.
(A) 2R (B) 3 √ 3 (√ 3 − 1 ) R (C) 3 √ 3 (√ 3 + 1 ) R (D) 4R
SECTION-II : (Maximum Marks: 12)
Linked Comprehension Type (Upto Second Decimal Place) 1 Para × 3 Q. [4 M (0)]
Paragraph for Questions 21 - 23
A pair of stars rotates about a common center of mass. One of the stars has a mass M which is twice as large

Rankers Academy JEE

as the mass m of the other. Their centres are at a distance d apart, d being large compared to the size of either
star.
1. x/2
The period of rotation of the stars about their common centre of mass in terms of d, m, G is T = 2 π d .
√ yGm
Then x + y is :-
2. Compare the angular momentum of the two stars about their common centre of mass by calculating the ratio
Lm/ LM is :-
3. Compare the kinetic energies of the two stars by calculating the ratio Km/KM is :-

SECTION-III : (Maximum Marks: 20)

Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 5 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. Electric dipole of moment P = Pî is kept at a point (x,y) in an electric field, E = 4xy2î + 4x2y^j . Find the forces
1
on the dipole is npy ( y 2 + 4x2 ) 2 . Find the value of n.
2. Four point charges +8 μ C, – 1 μ C, – 1 μ C and +8 μ C are fixed at the points, – 272 m, – 32 m, + 32 m and +
√ √ √

27 –4 kg and of charge +0.1 μ C moves along the – x

2 m respectively on the y-axis. A particle of mass 6 × 10
√

direction. Its speed at x = + ∞ is v0. Find the least value of v0 (in m/s) for which the particle will cross the
origin. Assume that space is gravity free. (Given : 1/(4 π ε 0) = 9 × 109 Nm2/C2)

E-6/8 PHYSICS/ GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-2

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

3. A non-uniform electric field in x-direction is increasing uniformly from 2N/C at x = 1m to 8 N/C at x = 7m.
The center of cube is at x = 2m. If the charge enclosed inside a small cube of side length 10 cm is 8.85 × 10 –5n
C. The value of n will be.
4. Two conducting spherical shell of radii R & 2R given charges Q and 2Q respectively. Inner shell is provided
with a switch which can ground the inner shell, as shown. Switch is initially open and energy stored in the
U1
system is U1. After the switch is closed, energy stored in the system is found to be U2. Find .
U2

5. A cube is made from six thin non-conducting square faces of size a each. Each face carries a uniformly
Q2
distributed charge Q. If electrostatic force acting on each face is , then find N.
N ∈ 0 a2
SECTION-IV : (Maximum Marks: 16)
Matrix Match Type (4 × 5) (One or more options correct) 2 Q. [8 M; (for each entry +2(0)]

Rankers Academy JEE

1. Four concentric hollow spheres of radii R, 2R, 3R and 4R have given the charges as shown. Now, the
conductors 1 and 3, 2 and 4 are connected by conducting wires at the same time, then match the entries of
column I with entries of column II.

Column-I Column-II
(A) The charge an inner surface of 3rd conductor (P) 22Q
−
5
Q
(B) The charge on 4th conductor (Q) −
8 π ∈ 0R

(C) The potential of conductor 1 (R) 6Q

5
(D) The potential of conductor 2 (S) −3Q
40 π ∈ 0 R
(T) None of these

PHYSICS/ GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-2 E-7/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

2. Figure shows an uncharged conducting body having a spherical cavity. Charge Q is placed at the centre of the
cavity.

Column-II
Column-I
(Components of
(Point)
electric field)
(A) 1 (inside cavity near surface) (P) Ex = 0
(B) 2 (near but outside conductor surface) (Q) Ey = 0
(C) 3 (inside bulk of conductor) (R) Ex ≠ 0
(D) 4 (near but outside conductor surface) (S) Ey ≠ 0

Rankers Academy JEE

(T) None of these

ANSWER KEY GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-2

Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6
SECTION-I (i)
A. A B B C B B
Q. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A. A,C A,B,C A,B,C A,B A,C,D A,D A,D A,C A,D A,D
SECTION-I (ii)
Q. 17 18 19 20
A. A,D A,B,C,D B,C A,B
Q. 1 2 3
SECTION-II
A. 6.00 2.00 2.00
Q. 1 2 3 4 5
SECTION-III
A. 4 3 3 5 2
Q. 1 2
SECTION-IV
A. A->R,B->P,C->S,D->Q A->QR,B->RS,C->PQ,D->PS

E-8/8 PHYSICS/ GR_Electrostatics & Gravitation-2

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_CURRENT ELECTRICITY
SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:6)
Single Correct Answer Type 2 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. Which of the following electric field pattern is correct inside the conductor having three materials of resistivity ?

(A) (B)

(C) (D)

2. A constant current I flows through a manganin wire of resistance R, length ℓ , radius of cross-section r, density
d and specific heat C. The resistance of manganin wire is independent of the temperature. The amount of heat
given off by unit surface area of the wire in unit time is given according to Newton's law of cooling as dQ =
dt
k(T – T0) where T0 is the temperature of the surrounding. Find the expression of temperature of wire at any
instant t.
(A) I 2R (B) I 2R

Rankers Academy JEE

2kt
− 2kt
T0 + (1 − e rCd ) T0 + (1 − e rCd )
2πrℓk πrℓk
(C) I 2R − 2kt (D) I 2R − 2kt
T0 + (1 − e rCd ) T0 + (1 − e rCd )
4πrℓk 2πrℓk
SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 40)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 10 Q. [4 M (–2)]
3. Figure shows a copper wire of nonuniform cross section carrying current towards right for sectors A, B and C.

(A) iB > iA > iC (i = current)

(B) EB > EA > EC (E = electric field)
(C) VB > VA > VC (V = drift velocity)
(D) JB > JA > JC (J = current density)

PHYSICS/ GR_CURRENT ELECTRICITY E-1/11

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

4. A metal sphere of radius a is surrounded by a concentric metal sphere of inner radius of b, where b > a. The
space between the spheres is filled with a material whose electrical conductivity σ varies with the electric field
strength E as σ = kE where k is a constant. A potential difference V is maintained between spheres.
(A) Current is 4 π r2 kE2, where (a < r < b)
(B) Current is 2 π r2 kE2, where (a < r < b)
(C) I
Potential difference between spheres is V = √ ℓ n ( b ) where I is total current
4πk a
(D) I b
Potential difference between spheres is V = √ ℓ n ( ) where I is total current
2πk a
5. The current in a wire of resistance 10 Ω varies as shown. Select correct alternative(s).

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) The heat produced in the wire in 4 s is 852.5 J
(B) The heat produced in the wire in 4 s is 850 J
(C) The charge flows across any section of the wire in 4 s is 15 C
(D) The charge flows across any section of the wire in 4 s is 15.5 C
6. A battery of emf 10 volt and internal resistance 2 Ω is connected to an external resistance 8W as shown in the figure :-

(A) Work done due to conservative electric field while a unit positive charge passes through battery
from Q to P (along the arrow) is 8 Joule.
(B) Work done due to conservative electric field while a unit positive charge passes through battery
from Q to P (along the arrow) is – 8 Joule.
(C) Work done due to conservative electric field while a unit positive charge passes through 8W along
the arrow is – 8 Joule.
(D) Work done due to non conservative electric field while a unit positive charge moves from Q to P
(along the arrow) is 10 Joule.
E-2/11 PHYSICS/ GR_CURRENT ELECTRICITY
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

7. In the meter bridge experiments initially balance point is J, where AJ= ℓ . One wants to make some changes in the
shown setup. After any change balance length being AJ' = ℓ ', then choose the correct statement(s). [Here R ≠ x]

(A) If in shown set-up the galvanometer and battery are inter changed current through galvanometer is
zero.
(B) radius of wire AB is double then ℓ ' = 2 ℓ
(C) if length of wire AB is doubled then ℓ '=2 ℓ
(D) If the values of R and x both are double and then interchanged then ℓ '= ℓ
8. A 20 m long potentiometer wire has a resistance of 20 ohm. It is connected in series with a battery of emf 3V
and a resistance of 10W. The internal resistance of cell is negligible. If the length can be read accurately up to
1 mm, the potentiometer can read voltage
(A) up to minimum of 0.2 mV (B) with an accuracy of 0.2 mV

Rankers Academy JEE

(C) with an accuracy of 0.1 mV (D) upto maximum of 2V
9. The circuit diagram shows a source of emf 10 V having an internal resistance of 2.5 Ω connected to an ideal
ammeter. The jockey can be slided to different points on the Rheostat whose total resistance is 10 Ω . What can
be the reading of the ammeter.

(A) 1A (B) 2A (C) 3A (D) 4A

10. Two identical moving coil galvanometer have 10 Ω resistance and full scale deflection at 2 µA current. One of
them is converted into a voltmeter of 100 mV full scale reading and the other into an Ammeter of 1 mA full
scale current using appropriate resistors. These are then used to measure the voltage and current in the Ohm's
law experiment with R = 1000 Ω resistor by using an ideal cell. Which of the following statement(s) is/are
correct ?
(A) The measured value of R will be 978 Ω < R < 982 Ω .
(B) The resistance of the Voltmeter will be 100 k Ω .
(C) The resistance of the Ammeter will be 0.02 Ω ( round off to 2nd decimal place)
(D) If the ideal cell is replaced by a cell having internal resistance of 5 W then the measured value of R
will be more than 1000 Ω .
PHYSICS/ GR_CURRENT ELECTRICITY E-3/11
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

11. In the figure. PQ is a wire of uniform cross-section and of resistance R0. A is an ideal ammeter and the cells are
of negligible resistance. The jockey J can freely slide over the wire PQ making contact on it at S. If the length of
the wire PS is f = 1/nth of PQ, find the value of ‘f’ for maximum and minimum reading on the ammeter.

(A) f = 0,1 for Imax (B) f = 0,1 for Imin (C) f = 1/2 for Imax (D) f = 1/2 for Imin
12. A galvanometer (coil resistance 99 Ω ) is converted into a ammeter using a shunt of 1 Ω and connected as
shown in the figure (i). The ammeter reads 3A. The same galvanometer is converted into a voltmeter by
connected a resistance of 101 Ω in series. This voltmeter is connected as shown in figure (ii). Its reading is
found to be 4/5 of the full scale reading. Then :

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) Internal resistance r of the cell is 1.01 Ω .
(B) Range of the ammeter is 0-5 A and voltmeter is 0-10 V.
(C) Full scale deflection current of the galvanometer is 0.05 A
(D) Full scale deflection current of the galvanometer is 0.1 A.
SECTION-I (iii) : (Maximum Marks: 24)
Linked Comprehension Type (Single Option Correct) (2 Para × 3 Q.) (1 Para × 2 Q.) [3 M (–1)]
Paragraph for Questions 13 and 14
Relation between current in conductor and time is shown in figure then determine.

13. Total charge flow through the conductor is :-

(A) 1 (B) 1 (C) i0t0 (D) None of these
i0 t0 i0 t0
2 4
E-4/11 PHYSICS/ GR_CURRENT ELECTRICITY
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

14. If resistance of conductor is R then total heat dissipated across resistance R is :-

(A) Rt0 i20 (B) Rt0 i20 (C) Rt0 i20 (D) Rt0 i20
2 6 3 4
Paragraph for Questions 15 - 17
A simple ohmmeter consists of battery connected in series with a galvanometer and a resistor, as shown in
figure. The resistance Rs is chosen such that when the terminals a and b are shorted (put in electrical contact,
with negligible resistance between them), the current through the galvanometer gives a full-scale deflection.
Thus, a full scale deflection indicates no resistance between terminals a and b. A zero deflection indicates an
infinite resistance between the terminals. When the terminals are connected across an unknown resistance R,
the current through the galvanometer depends on R, so the scale can be calibrated to give a direct reading of
R, as shown in figure. Because an ohmmeter sends a current through the resistance to be measured, some
caution must be exercised when using this instrument. For example, you would not want to try to measure the
resistance of sensitive ammeter with an ohmmeter, because the current provided by the battery in the
ohmmeter would probably damage the ammeter. Let us use a galvanometer with resistance of 20 Ω and
maximum current of 10 mA, ε = 1 V. For a current more that 10 mA, galvanometer would be damaged.

Rankers Academy JEE

15. The scale is non linear because
(A) the resistance changes with change in temperature.
(B) of internal resistance of the battery.
(C) the current in circuit decreases with increase in resistance.
(D) of internal resistance of galvanometer.
16. The minimum resistance required for rest of the circuit (other than galvanometer) is
(A) 20 Ω (B) 30 Ω (C) 80 Ω (D) 100 Ω
17. The reading in galvanometer when resistance connected between a and b is 100 Ω is
(A) 5 mA (B) 3.3 mA (C) 2 mA (D) 8 mA

PHYSICS/ GR_CURRENT ELECTRICITY E-5/11

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

Paragraph for Questions 18 - 20

In given circuit, all batteries, voltmeters and ammeters are ideal. Voltmeters and ammeters have only +ive
scale for reading. Resistance of each resistor is 5 Ω . Reading of voltmeters are V1 and V2 and of ammeters are
A1 and A2. Initially all switches are closed.

Coloumn – I Column-II Column-III

|A1 – A2| V1 V2

Rankers Academy JEE

(I) 3A (i) 20 V (P) 45 V
(II) 0A (ii) 30 V (Q) 35 V
(III) 5A (iii) 50 V (R) 40 V
(IV) 1A (iv) 40 V (S) 25 V
18. Only switch S2 is open
(A) (I) (iii) (S) (B) (IV) (ii) (P)
(C) (I) (iii) (P) (D) (IV) (ii) (S)
19. Only switch S3 is open :
(A) (III) (iii) (R) (B) (IV) (ii) (S)
(C) (I) (iii) (P) (D) (II) (iv) (Q)
20. Only switch S1 is open :
(A) (III) (iii) (P) (B) (I) (iii) (R)
(C) (IV) (ii) (P) (D) (III) (ii) (P)

E-6/11 PHYSICS/ GR_CURRENT ELECTRICITY

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (iv) : (Maximum Marks: 12)
Linked Comprehension Type (Multiple Options Correct) (1 Para × 3 Q.) [4 M (–1)]
Paragraph for Questions 21 - 23
The figure shows a tetrahedron, each side of which has a resistance r

21. Choose the correct statement(s) related to the resistance between any two points.
(A) RAB = RBD = RBC = RCD = RCA = RAD (B) RAB = RAC = RAD = RBD = RBC ≠ RCD
(C) RCD is the least (D) RAB = RAC = RBC and RCD = RAD = RBD
22. Choose the correct diagram(s), which show two-dimensional equivalent of the tetrahedron.
(B) (C) (D)
(A)

Rankers Academy JEE

23. If a battery is connected between any two points of the tetrahedron, then identify the correct statement(s).
(A) The potentials of the other two points are always equal.
(B) There always exists a branch through which no current flows.
(C) The current coming out of the battery in each case is same.
(D) None of these
SECTION-II : (Maximum Marks: 24)
Numerical-Answer-Type questions (Non Negative Integer) 6 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. On quadrupling the resistance 'R' connected to a battery the power dissipated in the resistance surprisingly does
not change. What is the internal resistance of the battery in Ohm? (Take R = 10 Ω )
2. One and a half litres of water at a temperature of 20°C is heated for 15 minutes on an electric table stove
burner having two sections with the same resistance. When the sections are connected in parallel, the water
begins to boil and 100 grams of it is converted into steam. The latent heat of vaporization is 540 cal per gram.
Starting from same initial conditions, the sections are connected in series. In what time (in min) will 100 gm of
water get converted into steam. Neglect all heat loses and heat capacity of the container. Density of water 1
gm/cc and specific heat capacity of water = 4200 J/kg°C.

PHYSICS/ GR_CURRENT ELECTRICITY E-7/11

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

3. A long conductor of circular cross-section has radius r and lenght ℓ as shown in the figure. The conductivity of
the material near the axis is σ 1. and increases linearly with the distance from axis and becomes σ 2 near the
surface. If the inverse of resistance of the conductor when the current enters from the one end and leaves from
1 π r2
the other end is given by = (2 σ 2 + σ 1). Find the value of n.
R nℓ

4. In circuit (a) the instruments read U1 = 100 V, I1 = 5µA. In circuit (b) we have U2 = 25 mV, I2 = 2.5 A. What
is the internal resistance of the cell (in Ohm). Round off to nearest integer. Consider both instruments to be
regular laboratory instruments.
5. The circuit diagram given in the figure shows the experimental setup for the measurement of unknown
resistance by using a meter bridge. The wire connected between the points P & Q has non-uniform resistance
such that resistance per unit length varies directly as the distance from the point P. Null point is obtained with
the jockey J with R1 and R2 in the given position. On interchanging the positions R1 and R2 in the gaps the
jockey has to be displaced through a distance Δ from the previous position along the wire to establish the null

Rankers Academy JEE

R1
point. If the ratio of = 3, find the value of Δ (in cm). Ignore any end corrections. [Take √ 3 = 1.7]
R2

6. The potential difference VA – VB for the circuit shown in the figure is − n V . Find the value of n.
9

E-8/11 PHYSICS/ GR_CURRENT ELECTRICITY

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-III : (Maximum Marks: 12)
Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 3 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. A constant voltage V0 (= 12V) is applied to a potential divider of resistance R (= 4 Ω ), connected to an ideal
ammeter. A constant resistor r (= 2 Ω ) is connected to the sliding contact of the potential divider (as shown).
Find the minimum current (in A) measured by ammeter.

2. In the circuit shown below, all the voltmeter identical and have very high resistance. Each resistor has the same
resistance. The voltage of the ideal battery shown is 27 V. Find the reading of voltmeter V3 (in volts).

Rankers Academy JEE

3. The coil of a heater has resistance of 5 Ω and is powered from a source of internal resistance 20 Ω . With what
resistance (in Ω ) should the coil be shunted to reduce the amount of power dissipated in it to one ninth of the
value without shunt resistance ?

PHYSICS/ GR_CURRENT ELECTRICITY E-9/11

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-IV : (Maximum Marks: 8)
Matrix Match Type (4 × 5) (One or more options correct) 1 Q. [8 M; (for each entry +2(0)]
1. The diagram shows a circuit with two identical resistors. The battery has a negligible internal resistance. What
will the effect on the ammeter and voltmeter be if the switch S is closed ?

Column-I Column-II
(A) Ammeter reading (P) Increases
(B) Voltmeter reading (Q) Decreases
(C) Equivalent resistance of circuit (R) Does not change
Power dissipated across R in right
(D) (S) Becomes zero
branch

Rankers Academy JEE

(T) Cannot be determined
SECTION-V : (Maximum Marks: 8)
SUBJECTIVE TYPE QUESTIONS 2 Q. (4 M, 0)
1. A long conductor of a circular cross-section of radius R is made of a material whose resistivity depends only
on the distance ‘r’ from the conductor’s central axis as ρ = a / r2, where a is a constant. The conductor has
length L (>>R). Its ends are maintained at a potential difference = Δ V. Find
(a) the electric field and current density in the conductor at any distance ‘r’ from the central axis.
(b) total rate of joule-heat production. The rate of loss of heat from the surface of the conductor is λ (TS – TA),
where ‘TS’ is the surface temperature of the conductor, ‘TA’ the ambient temperature and ‘ λ ’ is some constant.
Find
(c) surface temperature (TS) in steady state. If the thermal conductivity of the conductor’s material is ‘k’
everywhere find
(d) the temperature in the conductor as a function of ‘r’. Assuming steady state.

E-10/11 PHYSICS/ GR_CURRENT ELECTRICITY

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

2. A series combination of a 2k Ω resistor and a 1k Ω resistor, is connected across a battery of emf 6V and
negligible internal resistance. The potential drop, across the 2k Ω resistor, is measured by (a) a 30k Ω voltmeter
(b) a 1k Ω voltmeter and (c) both these voltmeters connected across it. If the voltmeter readings in the three
cases are V1, V2 and V3 respectively, arrange these readings in descending other.

How will the three readings compare with one another if the potential drop were measured across the series
combination of the 2k Ω and the 1k Ω resistor i.e., across the points A and B ?

Rankers Academy JEE

PHYSICS/ GR_CURRENT ELECTRICITY E-11/11

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
ANSWER KEY GR_CURRENT ELECTRICITY
PHYSICS
Q. 1 2
SECTION-I (i)
A. A D
Q. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SECTION-I (ii)
A. B,C,D A,C B,C B,D A,C C,D B,C,D A,C A,D A,B,C

Q. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
SECTION-I (iii)
A. A C C C A B C D
Q. 21 22 23
SECTION-I (iv)
A. A,D A,B,C,D A,B,C
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6
SECTION-II
A. 20 60 3 40 35 22.00
Q. 1 2 3
SECTION-III
A. 2 6 2
Q. 1
SECTION-IV
A. A->P,B->P,C->Q,D->QS

Q. 1 2
SECTION-V
A.

Rankers Academy JEE

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_CAPACITOR
SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:27)
Single Correct Answer Type 9 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. Three identical metal plates of large area A numbered 1, 2,3 are arranged as shown in the diagram. The plates-
1 and 3 are connected by a conducting wire. The charge given to plate 2 is 2q0 and no other plate is given any
charge. Find the potential difference between the plate 2 and 3.

(A) 4 q0 d (B) 8 q0 d (C) 12 q0 d (D) 2 q0 d

3 A∈0 3 A∈0 3 A∈0 3 A∈0
2. The capacitance of C1 and C2 shown in the diagram is C. C1 is initially uncharged and C2 is given a charge 2Ce
as shown. Which of the following graph represents charge on plate B of capacitor C2 as a function of time ?

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) (B)

(C) (D)

3. A parallel plate capacitor, partially filled with a dielectric slab of dielectric constant K, is connected with a cell
of emf V volt, as shown in the figure. Separation between the plates is D. Then

(A) electric field at point P is less than that at point P′. (B) electric field at point P′ is less than that at point P.

(C) electric fields at points P and P ′ are equal (D) electric field at point P is E = V .
KD
PHYSICS/ GR_CAPACITOR (1) E-1/12
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

4. A metal ball of radius R is surrounded by a homogeneous medium of dielectric constant K and resistivity ρ .
The ball is given a charge Q at t = 0, which starts leaking through the medium towards infinity. After how
much time will the charge on the ball become Q/2?
(A) [2Κ ρ ε 0].ln2 (B) [K ρ ε 0].ln2 (C) [K ρ ε 0/2].ln2 (D) None
5. A parallel plate capacitor is filled with 3 dielectric materials of same thickness, as shown in the sketch. The
dielectric constants are such that κ 3 > κ 2 > κ 1. Let the magnitudes of the electric field in and potential drops
across each dielectric be E3, E2, E1, Δ V3, Δ V2, and Δ V1, respectively. Which one of the following statements
is true?

(A) E3 < E2 < E1 and Δ V3 < Δ V2 < Δ V1 (B) E3 > E2 > E1 and Δ V3 > Δ V2 > Δ V1
(C) E3 < E2 < E1 and Δ V3 > Δ V2 > Δ V1 (D) E3 > E2 > E1 and Δ V3 < Δ V2 < Δ V1
6. A dielectric slab is introduced between the plates of a capacitor. If the charge on the capacitor before the slab
is introduced is q and the magnitude of the induced charge on the dielectric surface is q', then

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) q' < q (always) (B) q' > q (always) (C) q' = q (always) (D) q' = 0
7. In the circuit shown in the figure K1 is open. The charge on capacitor C in steady state is q1. Now key is closed
and at steady state charge on C is q2. The ratio of charges q1/q2 is :

(A) 5/3 (B) 3/5 (C) 1 (D) 2/3

E-2/12 (2) PHYSICS/ GR_CAPACITOR

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

8. In the given circuit, charge Q2 on the 2µF capacitor changes as C is varied from 1µF to 3µF. Q2 as a function
of 'C' is given properly by : (figures are drawn schematically and are not to scale) :-

(A) (B)

(C) (D)

9.
Rankers Academy JEE
In the RC circuit shown, what is the variation of the current I as a function of time? The capacitor is initially
uncharged and the switch is closed at time t = 0 sec.

(A) V −t
(B) V t
(C) V −t
(D) None of these
(e RC − 1) (e RC − 1) (e RC + 1)
R R R

PHYSICS/ GR_CAPACITOR (3) E-3/12

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 32)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 8 Q. [4 M (–2)]
10. For the given circuit, select the correct alternative(s)

(A) The equivalent capacitance between points 1 & 2 is 15C

11
(B) The equivalent capacitance between points 3 & 6 is 5C
3
(C) The equivalent capacitance between points 1 & 3 is 15C
14
(D) The equivalent capacitance between points 3 & 5 is 14C
15
11. A parallel plate air capacitor is connected to a battery. If plates of the capacitor are slowly pulled apart, then

Rankers Academy JEE

which of the following statements is/are incorrect ?
(A) Strength of electric field inside the capacitor remains unchanged, if battery is disconnected
before pulling the plates.
(B) During the process, negative work is done by an external force applied to pull the plates
whether battery is disconnected or it remains connected.
(C) Potential energy in the capacitor decreases if the battery remains connected during pulling
plates apart.
(D) Potential energy in the capacitor decreases if the battery is disconnected before pulling plates apart.
12. We have a parallel plate capacitor made of two conducting, circular sheets of radius 2R each. They are kept at
a small separation d between them. Suppose, we insert a circular shape dielectric of radius R and thickness d,
between the gap with its centre coinciding with the plate centres the dielectric constant is k. The correct
statement is/are :
(A) (k + 3) ∈ 0 π R2
Capacitance of the capacitor is
d
(B) k ∈ 0 π (4R2 )
Capacitance of the capacitor is
d
(C) Ratio of electric field in the region with dielectric & without dielectric is 1
(D) Ratio of electric field in the region with dielectric & without dielectric is 1 : k

E-4/12 (4) PHYSICS/ GR_CAPACITOR

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

13. A dielectric slab is filled in between the plates of parallel plate charged capacitor. Di-electric constant of the
capacitor varies with x as k = x k0 . Capacitor is not connected with the battery. Then choose the correct
d
statement(s) :-

(A) Net electric field inside the di-electric is uniform throughout the capacitor.
(B) Net electric field inside the dielectric decreases on moving along x-direction inside the capacitor.
(C) Bound charge density inside the di-electric is zero.
(D) Bound charge density inside the dielectric is non-uniform.
14. The figure, a graph of the current in a discharging circuit of a capacitor through a resistor of resistance 10 Ω .

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) The initial potential difference across the capactitor is 100 volt.
(B) The capacitance of the capacitor is 1
F.
10 ℓ n2
(C) The total heat produced in the circuit will be 500
joules.
ℓ n2
(D) The thermal power in the resistor will decrease with a time constant 1
second.
2 ℓ n2
15. In the connection shown in the figure the switch K is open and the capacitor is uncharged. Then we close the switch
and let the capacitor charge upto the maximum and open the switch again. The values indicated by the galvanometer.

(A) increases after closing the switch and then decreases after opening the switch
(B) direction of current is same through the galvanometer before and after opening the switch again
(C) after opening the switch again energy dissipation in R1 s zero
(D) after opening the switch again energy dissipation in R2 is zero
PHYSICS/ GR_CAPACITOR (5) E-5/12
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

16. A capacitor of capacitance 0.1 μ F is connected to a battery of emf 8V as shown in the fig. Under steady state
condition

(A) charge on the capacitor is 0.4 μ C.

(B) charge on the capacitor is 0.2 μ C
(C) current in the resistor between point A and B is 0.2 A
(D) current in the resistor between point A and B is 0.4 A
17. For the arrangement shown in the figure, the key is closed at t = 0. C2 is initially uncharged while C1 has a
charge of 2 μ C.

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) The current coming out of the battery just after switch is closed 7
A.
50
(B) The current coming out of the battery just after switch is closed 11
A.
50
(C) The charge on the capacitor Q1 in the steady state condition is 9µC.
(D) The charge on the capacitor Q2 in the steady state condition is 0.

E-6/12 (6) PHYSICS/ GR_CAPACITOR

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (iii) : (Maximum Marks: 12)
Linked Comprehension Type (Single Option Correct) (2 Para × 2 Q.) [3 M (–1)]
Paragraph for Questions 18 and 19
In the circuit shown in figure, switch S is closed at time t = 0. Thereafter the constant current source by
varying its emf, maintains a constant current I out of its upper terminal.

18. Derive an expression for the charge on the capacitor as a function of time :-
(A) t
(B) t
(C) t
(D) i − t
q = iRC (e− RC ) q = iRC (1 − e− RC ) q = it (1 − e− RC ) q= (1 − e RC )
RC
19. Find the time at which the rate of energy storage on capacitor is equal to the rate of heat dissipation through
resistor :-

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) RC ℓ n2 (B) t = 2RC ℓ n 2 (C) t = RC ℓ n 2 (D) Not possible
t=
2

PHYSICS/ GR_CAPACITOR (7) E-7/12

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

Paragraph for Questions 20 and 21

Consider a simple RC circuit as shown in figure 1.
Process 1 : In the circuit the switch S is closed at t = 0 and the capacitor is fully charged to voltage V0 (i.e.,
charging continues for time T >> RC). In the process some dissipation (ED) occurs across the resistance R.
The amount of energy finally stored in the fully charged capacitor is EC.
v0
Process 2 : In a different process the voltage is first set to and maintained for a charging time
3
2v
T >> RC. Then the voltage is raised to 0 without discharging the capacitor and again maintained for a
3
time T >> RC. The process is repeated one more time by raising the voltage to V0 and the capacitor is
charged to the same final voltage V0 as in Process 1.
These two processes are depicted in Figure 2.

Rankers Academy JEE

20. In Process 1, the energy stored in the capacitor EC and heat dissipated across resistance ED are related by:-
(A) EC = ED (B) EC = 2ED (C) EC = ED (D) EC = ED ln2
21. In Process 2, total energy dissipated across the resistance ED is :-
(A) E = 1 1 (B) E = 3 1
D ( CV02 ) D ( CV02 )
3 2 2
(C) E = 1 (D) ED = 3CV02
D CV02
2
SECTION-II : (Maximum Marks: 16)
Numerical Answer type Questions (Upto Second Decimal Place) 4 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. In the given circuit switch s is open initially. If C = 2 μ F and v = 3 volt. Then find heat produced (in μ J) in the
circuit after closing the switch.

E-8/12 (8) PHYSICS/ GR_CAPACITOR

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

2. An electron enters the region between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor at a point equidistant from either
plate. The capacitor plates are 2 × 10 –2 m apart & 10 –1 m long . A potential difference of 300 volt is kept
across the plates. Assuming that the initial velocity of the electron is parallel to the capacitor plates. The largest
√ x
value of the velocity of the electron so that it does not fly out of the capacitor at the other end is ×108
2√9.1
m/s. Find the value of x.
3. Two square metallic plates of 1 m side are kept 0.01 m apart, like a parallel plate capacitor, in air in such a way
that one of their edges is perpendicular, to an oil surface in a tank filled with an insulating oil. The plates are
connected to a battery of e.m.f. 500 volt. The plates are then lowered vertically into the oil at a speed of 0.001
m/s. The current drawn from the battery during the process is n × 10 –9 Ampere. Find the value of 2n. [di-
electric constant of oil = 11, ∈ 0 = 8.85 × 10 –12 C2/N2 m2]
4. A certain series RC circuit is formed using a resistance R, a capacitor without dielectric having a capacitance C
= 2F and a battery of emf E = 3V. The circuit is completed and it is allowed to attain the steady state. After

Rankers Academy JEE

this, at t = 0, half the thickness of the capacitor is filled with a dielectric of constant K = 2 as shown in the
figure. The system is again allowed to attain a steady state. What will be the heat generated (in joule) in the
circuit between t = 0 and t = ∞ ?

PHYSICS/ GR_CAPACITOR (9) E-9/12

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-III : (Maximum Marks: 8)
Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 2 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. Initially the plates of the parallel plate capacitor shown in the figure are A and B containing charge +2µC and
– 2µC respectively. Negatively charged plate B is connected to a spring of spring constant 5000N/m at one end
and the other end of the spring is connected to a rigid support. Now the plate A is fixed and the system is
α × 10−12
released from rest. The maximum elongation produced in the spring is m. The area of the plates is
∈0
2 cm2, the medium between the plates is air and Electric permittivity of air is ∈ 0 (in SI). Then the value of α .

2. Two square plates with side length ℓ are arranged parallel to each other at distance d. They are charged to a
potential difference V0 and isolated from the source. A dielectric with a permittivity ε r = 2 whose thickness is
d and width is equal to that of the plates is drawn into the space between the plates. The length of the dielectric
α CV02
is greater than ℓ (figure). The resulting force F acting on the dielectric at distance x = ℓ /2 is where

Rankers Academy JEE

βℓ
ε0 ℓ2
C= . Take α and β as minimum integers. Find β – α .
d

E-10/12 (10) PHYSICS/ GR_CAPACITOR

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-IV : (Maximum Marks: 24)
Matrix Match Type (4 × 5) (One or more options correct) 3 Q. [8 M; (for each entry +2(0)]
1. Column – I shows some parameters after completion of event and Column – II shows tha arrangements to which
these parameters belong.
Column-I Column-II
Dielectric is being removed
slowly from a charged
capacitor
Work done by external
(A) (P)
agent is negative

Dielectric being introduced

slowly while battery is
connected
Electric field between plates
(B) (Q)
increases

Rankers Academy JEE Dielectric is being

introudced slowly in a
Energy of capacitor charged capacitor
(C) (R)
decreases

Plates of capacitor are being

slowly moved closer
Force between plates
(D) (S)
remains constant

Plates of capacitor are being

moved slowly in a charged
capacitor
(T)

PHYSICS/ GR_CAPACITOR (11) E-11/12

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

2. In the given figure initially all switches are open and the capacitor has charge q. At t = 0, switch S0 is closed
along with S1 or S2 or both. Column I has the entries for the actions on switches and column II has the values
of currents I1 & I2 at t = 0. (R = 1 Ω )

Column-I Column-II
S and S1 closed and q = 1
(A) 0 (P) I1 < 2I2
μC
S0 and S1 closed and q = –
(B) (Q) I2 = 0
1μC
S , S and S2 closed and q =
(C) 0 1 (R) I1 > 4I2
1μC

Rankers Academy JEE

S , S and S2 closed and q =
(D) 0 1 (S) I1 > 1A
–1μC
(T) I1 ≤ 1A
3. Column-I Column-II
Plates of an isolated, charged, Electric energy stored inside
(A) parallel plate, air core capacitor are (P) capacitor increases in the
slowly pulled apart. process.
A dielectric is slowly inserted inside
Force between the two plates of
an isolated and charged parallel plate
(B) (Q) the capacitor remain
air cored capacitor to completely fill unchanged.
the space between plates.
Plates of a parallel plate capacitor Electric field in the region
(C) connected across a battery are slowly (R) between plates remain
pulled apart. unchanged.
A dielectric slab is slowly inserted
inside a parallel plate capacitor Total electric energy stored
(D) connected across a battery to (S) inside capacitor decreases in
completely fill the space the process.
between plates.
(T) Electric field in the region
decreases.

E-12/12 (12) PHYSICS/ GR_CAPACITOR

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
ANSWER KEY GR_CAPACITOR
PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SECTION-I (i)
A. B C C B A A A D A
Q. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
SECTION-I (ii)
A. A,B,C B,D A,C B,D A,B,C,DA,B,CA,CA,B,C,D

SECTION-I Q. 18 19 20 21
(iii) A. B C A A
Q. 1 2 3 4
SECTION-II
A. 4.50 4.8 8.85 3.00
Q. 1 2
SECTION-III
A. 4 7
Q. 1 2 3
SECTION-IV A->QRST,B->PS,C->RT,D- A->QRT,B->PS,C->RS,D- A->PQR,B->QST,C->ST,D-
A.
>PRT >PS >PR

Rankers Academy JEE

(13)
Rankers Academy JEE

(14)
Rankers Academy JEE

(15)
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_MAGNETIC EFFECT OF CURRENT
SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:21)
Single Correct Answer Type 7 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. Current I flowing along the path ABCD, along the four edges of the cube (figure-a), creates a magnetic field
in the centre of the cube of B0. Find the magnetic field B created at the center of the cube by a current I
flowing along the path of the six edges ABCGHEA (figure-b)

(A) 3 (B) 3B0 Towards corner E

√ B0 Towards corner G √

2
(C) 3 (D) 3B0 Towards corner F
√ B0 Towards corner H √

2
2. A thin uniform rod with negligible mass and length ℓ is attached to the floor by a frictionless hinge at point P.

Rankers Academy JEE

A horizontal spring with force constant k connects the other end to wall. The rod is in a uniform magnetic field
B directed into the plane of paper. What is extension in spring in equilibrium when a current i is passed
through the rod in direction shown. Assuming spring to be in natural length initially.

(A) 5i ℓ B (B) 3i ℓ B (C) 5i ℓ B (D) 5i ℓ B

8k 8k 4k 6k
3. ^ ^
i +k
A positive charge particle having charge q and mass m has velocity →v = v ( ) in the magnetic field at
√ 2
the origin. Its speed as the function of y is :-

(A) qE (B) B
2
qE (C) 2qE
√
v2 + y √( 2
) + v + y √
v2 + y (D) None of the above
2m E 2m m

PHYSICS/ GR_MAGNETIC EFFECT OF CURRENT (1) E-1/10

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

4. Two uniform magnetic fields B1 and B2 exist above and below the plane. The magnetic force acting on unit
area of the plane is :-

(C) B1 +B2 ∣2
(A) B22 − B21 (B) |B1 − B2 |2 ∣

↑ ↓
∣ 2 ∣
↑
(D) None of the above
2μ0 2μ0 2μ0
5. To increase the current sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer, we should : –
(A) decrease number of turns in coil (B) decrease area of cross section of the coil
(C) increase torsional constant of spiral springs (D) None of the above
6. A straight conductor of mass 100gm and length 20cm is placed on the xy plane in a gravity free space. A
uniform and constant magnetic field of 1000T in positive z direction is applied on it. A charge of 1mC is
passed through the rod in a very short time duration and the conductor begins to move just after all the charge
has passed through it. Assuming no friction, the velocity of the conductor is :

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) 2cm/s (B) 2 m/s (C) 0 (D) 20 cm/s
7. In case figure (a) and (b) a positive charge particle of mass m and charge q is given velocity 'v' at the lowest
point of a smooth fixed sphere of radius R. In both cases circular motion is in the plane of the paper. In case
(b) magnetic field is also switched on in inward direction. If at point P, v1 and v2 , N1 and N2 , are velocities
and normal forces in two cases respectively then.

(A) v1 = v2 and N1 > N2 (B) v1 < v2 and N1 > N2

(C) v1 > v2 and N1 > N2 (D) v1 = v2 and N1 = N2

E-2/10 (2) PHYSICS/ GR_MAGNETIC EFFECT OF CURRENT

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 40)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 10 Q. [4 M (–2)]
8. Figure shows a square current carrying coil of edge length L. The magnetic field on the coil is given by
→ = B0 y i^ + B0 x j^ where B is a positive constant.
B 0
L L

(A) If coil is free to rotate about x axis torque on the coil is given by 1 ^
iAB0 i .
2
(B) If coil is free to rotate about y - axis torque on coil is given by − 1 iAB0 j^.
2
(C) Resultant force on coil is zero.
(D) Equation for the torque →μ × B→ where µ is magnetic moment of coil is not valid on the coil.
9. Consider a cube of side 'a' as shown. Eight point charges are placed at the corners. The cube is rotated about

Rankers Academy JEE

the axis with constant angular velocity ' ω ':

(A) Net magnetic field at the centre of cube is zero

(B) √ 2 μ 0q ω
Net magnetic field at the centre of cube is
πa
(C) Net magnetic field at the centre of cube is 8 μ 0q ω
3√3 π a
(D) If polarity of any four charges are reversed, then magnetic field at the centre of cube will be zero.

PHYSICS/ GR_MAGNETIC EFFECT OF CURRENT (3) E-3/10

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

10. Charge is sprayed onto a large non conducting belt above the left hand roller. The belt carries charge with a
uniform surface charge density σ , as it moves with a speed v between the rollers as shown. The charge is
removed by a wiper at right hand roller. For a point just above the sheet mark the correct option.

(A) magnetic field is μ 0 σ v, out of the plane of the page, parallel to axis of roller.
2
(B) magnetic field is μ 0 σ , out of the plane of the page, perpendicular to axis
(C) electic field is ε 0 σ perpendicular to the plane of sheet
2
(D) If an electron moves parallel to V just above the sheet it will experience an upward magnetic force.
11. Figure shows the essential parts of an apparatus to demonstrate the Hall effect. Which of the following
statement (s) is/are correct ?

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) In the arrangement above, the Hall potential difference is developed across PQ
(B) The magnitude of the Hall potential is greater if the applied magnetic flux density is increased
(C) The magnitude of the Hall potential is less if the width PQ of the specimen is decreased
(D) Hall potential is independent of material used for conductor

12. A charged particle having its charge to mass ratio as β goes in a conical pendulum of length L making an angle
θ with vertical and angular velocity ω . If a magnetic field B is directed vertically downwards (see figure) :

(A) 1 g
B= [ ω− ]
β ω L cos θ
(B) Angular momentum of the particle about the point of suspension remains constant.
(C) If the direction of B were reversed maintaining same ω and L, then θ will remain unchanged.
(D) Rate of change of angular momentum of the particle about the point of suspension is not a constant vector.

E-4/10 (4) PHYSICS/ GR_MAGNETIC EFFECT OF CURRENT

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

13. A cylindrical wire is rolling on rough inclined plane. There exist a magnetic field along the plane as shown. At
a certain instant, when its angular velocity is ω , a current i is switched on across the length of cylinder in such
a way that its angular velocity becomes constant. Find the correct statement(s) :-

(A) translational velocity will also become constant

(B) normal reaction will become zero
(C) friction force will become zero
(D) force on the cylinder due to magnetic field will be mgcos θ .
14. Two long parallel conductors are carrying currents in the same direction as shown in the figure. The upper
conductor (A) carries a current of 100 A and is held firmly in position. The lower conductor (B) carries a current
of 50 A and is free to slide up and down. The linear mass density of the lower conductor is 0.01 kg m –1.

(A) Conductor B will be in equilibrium if the distance between the conductors is 0.01 m –1.

Rankers Academy JEE

(B) Conductor B performs SHM with period π s.
(C) Equilibrium of conductor B is stable.
50

(D) Equilibrium of conductor B is unstable.

15. A uniform circular loop of mass 'm' and radius R is lying in space where a uniform magnetic field
→ = B (i^ + 3j^). The loop carries constant current I in clockwise direction and lies in a gravity free region at
B √
0

rest in xy – plane with its centre at origin. Then choose the CORRECT statement(s) :-

(A) The initial angular acceleration of the loop has magnitude 4I π B0

.
m
(B) The initial angular acceleration of the loop has magnitude 2I π B0
m
(C) √3^ 1^
The unit vector in the direction of initial angular acceleration is ( + i − j)
2 2

(D) √3 −R
The initial acceleration of the point with coordinate (
2
R,
2
) is zero

PHYSICS/ GR_MAGNETIC EFFECT OF CURRENT (5) E-5/10

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

16. In the figure shown a coil of single turn is wound on a sphere of radius R and mass M. The plane of the coil is
parallel to the inclined plane and lies in the equatorial plane of the sphere. Current in the coil is i. The sphere is
in equilibrium.

(A) The value of B is mg tan θ

π iR
(B) The current in coil is clockwise as seen from top.
(C) Minimum friction coefficient required is tan θ .
(D) If the surface is smooth, sphere will slide down without rotation.
17. Outer cylinder of the coaxial conductor of radius ‘b’ is given a positive potential V relative to the inner
cylinder of radius ‘a’ as shown in the fig. A static magnetic field B parallel to the axis of the cylinder, directed
out of the plane of the paper is also present. Choose the correct statement from the following statements.
(i) An electron (mass = me) is set free with negligible velocity at the surface of the inner cylinder under

Rankers Academy JEE

2eV0
condition V = V0 and B = 0. The velocity of electron will be v = √
me
, when it hits the outer cylinder.
(ii) An electron (mass = me) is set free with negligible velocity at the surface of the inner cylinder under
eV0
condition V = V0 and B = 0. The velocity of electron will be v = √
, when it hits the outer cylinder.
me
(iii) An electron (mass = me) starts out with an initial velocity u0 in the radial direction under condition V = 0
2b me u0
and B ≠ 0. The critical field will be BC = for which electron will not reach the outer cylinder.
e(b2 − a2 )
(iv) An electron (mass = me) starts out with an initial velocity u0 in the radial direction under condition V = 0
4bme u0
and B ≠ 0. The critical field will be BC = for which electron will not reach the outer cylinder.
e(b2 − a2 )

(A) (i) (B) (ii) (C) (iii) (D) (iv)

E-6/10 (6) PHYSICS/ GR_MAGNETIC EFFECT OF CURRENT

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (iii) : (Maximum Marks: 15)
Linked Comprehension Type (Single Option Correct) (1 Para × 3 Q & 1 Para × 2 Q.)[3 M (–1)]
Paragraph for Questions 18 - 20
A beam of electrons has radius r and contains n electrons per cubic meter moving with velocity →v along the
beam (figure). Assume that a beam is much longer than its diameter forms a cylindrically symmetric
distribution of charge and current. The beam expand if the electric force exceeds the magnetic force. So long
as the expansion is slow, the approximation of cylindrical symmetry and static fields remain valid.

18. What is electric field produced on the edge of the beam?

(A) E→ = ner ^r (B) E→ = ner r^ (C) → = −ner r^
E (D) → = −ner r^
E
4ε0 2ε0 4ε0 2ε0
19. What is the magnetic field produced on the edge of the beam?
(A) ner μ 0 v (B) ner μ 0 v (D) ner
(C) ner μ 0 v μ 0v
4 2 6
20. What is net force on the electron at the edge of the beam?
(A) 2ne2 r 2 ^ (B) ne2 r 2 ^
1 − μ 0 ε 0v
( ) r (1 − μ 0 ε 0 v ) r
ε0 2ε0

Rankers Academy JEE

(C) 4ne2 r (D) ne2 r
( 1 − μ 0 ε 0 v2 ) ^r 2 ^
(1 − μ 0 ε 0 v ) r
ε0 4ε0
Paragraph for Questions 21 and 22
When a conductor carries a current i the charge carriers move with a drift velocity vd directed along the length
of conductor. A uniform magnetic field B is applied perpendicular to current as shown in figure. Magnetic
force deflects charge carriers. As a resultant of magnetic deflection a potential difference called Hall voltage
is established in transverse direction to current. In usual notations n = number of electron per unit volume, σ
= conductivity of conductor, q = magnitude of charge carrier.

21. Mark the correct option :

(A) In steady state face CFGD becomes positively charged
(B) Hall voltage developed across conductor has magnitude 1 iB
nq Y
(C) An electric field is established from face ABCD towards EFGH
(D) By decreasing Z, voltage developed can be increased.

PHYSICS/ GR_MAGNETIC EFFECT OF CURRENT (7) E-7/10

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

22. Direction of resultant electric field inside conductor from x-axis is given by :
(A) σB (B) iB (C) σn (D) ni
tan α = tan α = tan α = tan α =
nq σn iB σB
SECTION-II : (Maximum Marks: 8)
Numerical Answer type Questions (Upto Second Decimal Place) 2 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. Two coaxial long solenoids having number of turns 3000 & 1500 per metre, radii 2.0 m & 1.0 m and carry
current of 2A & 4A in opposite sense respectively. Find the magnetic energy stored per unit length (in J/m).
[Take π 2 = 10]
2. A 1.5 m diameter cyclotron is to accelerate protons to an energy of 8 MeV. The magnetic field strength for this
cyclotron required is given by B tesla. Fill 300 B in OMR sheet. (Given mass of proton = 1.6 × 10 –27 kg)
SECTION-III : (Maximum Marks: 20)
Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 5 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. A slab is inserted between two parallel plates of a capacitor charged to Q0. The capacitor is discharged
through the slab. A magnetic field is present throughout and is out of the plane of the paper. The total
momentum given to the slab after complete discharge is xdBQ0. Find the value of x.

Rankers Academy JEE

2. Figure shows circular region of radius R = 3m in which upper half has uniform magnetic field
√

→ = 0.2 −k^ T and lower half has uniform magnetic field B

B ( )
^
→ = 0.2kT . A very thin parallel beam of point
charges each having mass m = 2 gm, speed v = 0.3 m/sec and charge q = +1 mC are projected along the
diameter as shown in figure. A screen is placed perpendicular to initial velocity of charges as shown. If the
distance between the points on screen where charges will strikes after being deflected by the magnetic field is
4X meters, then calculate X.

E-8/10 (8) PHYSICS/ GR_MAGNETIC EFFECT OF CURRENT

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

3. A long, cylindrical conductor of radius R has two cylindrical cavities of diameter R running parallel to its axis
as shown in figure. The conductor carries a uniform current density J. The field strength B at position Q (x =
2R) along the x-axis is α µ0JR then find α .
68

4. The current density inside a long solid cylindrical wire of radius a is in the direction of the central axis and
varies linearly with radial distance r from the axis according to J = J0 r . If the magnetic field inside wire is
a
μ 0 J0 rx
given by then find value of x + y.
ya
5. An infinite hollow cylinder of radius R having uniform surface charge density σ is rotated with constant
angular velocity ω about about its axis. Magnetic field at the centre of cylinder is B = μ 0 σ Rx ω . Find x

Rankers Academy JEE

PHYSICS/ GR_MAGNETIC EFFECT OF CURRENT (9) E-9/10

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-IV : (Maximum Marks: 8)
Matrix Match Type (4 × 5) (One or more options correct) 1 Q. [8 M; (for each entry +2(0)]
1. Match the column.
Column-I Column-II
Current (X) is flowing axially on the
surface of a long thin hollow pipe of
The pressure on walls due to radius r.
(A) quantity ‘X’ is tending to (P)
contract them

Energy : Magnetic field energy

Current (X) is flowing tangentially on
the surface of a long thin hollow pipe
of radius r.
The pressure on walls due to
(B) quantity ‘X’ is tending to (Q)
expand them

Rankers Academy JEE Energy : Magnetic field energy

Two current (X) carrying infinite thin
sheets as shown in figure.
The energy/volume inside the
(C) (R)
walls is more than outside.

Energy : Magnetic field energy.

A soap bubble present in air containing
[Link] temperature inside and outside
The energy/volume outside the air is the same. Surface tension is (X)
(D) (S)
walls is more than inside.

Energy : internal energy of air

Point source of light (X) is present at
the centre of a spherical shell with both
(T)
surfaces perfectly black. Energy : light
energy.

E-10/10 (10) PHYSICS/ GR_MAGNETIC EFFECT OF CURRENT

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
ANSWER KEY GR_MAGNETIC EFFECT OF CURRENT
PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SECTION-I (i)
A. D A C A D B A
Q. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
SECTION-I (ii)
A. A,B,C,D C,D A,D A,B A,D B,C,D A,D A,C,D B,C A,C

Q. 18 19 20 21 22
SECTION-I (iii)
A. D B B D A
Q. 1 2
SECTION-II
A. 216.00 160.00
Q. 1 2 3 4 5
SECTION-III
A. 1 3 9 5 1
Q. 1
SECTION-IV
A. A->PS,B->QRT,C->QRT,D->P

Rankers Academy JEE

(11)
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_EMI & AC
SECTION-I(i) (Maximum Marks:24)
Single Correct Answer Type 8 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. In the circuit shown in figure, A is a sliding contact which can move over a smooth rod PQ. Resistance per unit
length of the rod PQ is 1 ohm/m. Initially slider is just left to the point P and circuit is in the steady state. At t =
0 slider starts moving with constant velocity v = 5 m/s towards right. Current in the circuit at t = 2 sec is :-

(A) 1 amp (B) less than 0.5 amp

(C) more than 1 amp (D) in between 0.5 to 1.0 amp
2. The given figure shows an inductor and resistor fixed on a conducting wire. A movable conducting wire PQ
starts moving on the fixed rails from t = 0 with constant velocity 1 m/s. The work done by the external force on
the wire PQ in 2 seconds is :-

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) 16 J (B) 32 J (C) 48 J (D) 64 J
3. A solenoid of inductance L and resistance r is connected in parallel to a resistance R. A battery of emf E and of
negligible internal resistance is connected across this parallel combination as shown in figure. The circuit is in
steady state. At time t = 0, switch S is opened. Choose the correct option(s).

(A) E (r + R)
Current in the inductor just after opening of the switch is =
rR
(B) Total energy dissipated in the solenoid and the resistor long time after opening of the switch is
2
1 E 2 (R + r)
L
2 r 2 R2
(C) The amount of heat generated in the solenoid after opening of switch is E 2L
2r (r + R)
(D) The amount of heat generated in the solenoid after opening of the switch is E 2L
2R (r + R)
PHYSICS/ GR_EMI & AC (1) E-1/11
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

4. In the given L-C-R circuit the value of rms current through the a.c. source is

(A) Vrms (B) Vrms

2 2
√
R2 + ( ω L − ω1 C) √
R2 + ( 1− ω L
ω 2 LC )
(C) Vrms (D) Vrms
√ R2 + ( ω 2 LC − ω L)2 √ (R + ω L)2 + 1
ω 2C 2
5. Consider L, C, R circuit as shown in figure, with a.c. source of peak value V and angular frequency ω . Then
the peak value of current through the ac source

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) V
(B) 1 1
2

1
2 V√ +( − ω C)
√
+ ( ω L − ω1 C) R 2 ωL
R2

(C) V (D) V RωC

2
√
R2 + ( ω L − ω1 C) √
ω 2 C 2 + R( ω 2 C 2 − 1)2
6. The plot given below is of the average power delivered to an LRC circuit versus frequency. The quality factor
of the circuit is :

(A) 5 (B) 2.4 (C) 2.8 (D) 1.4

E-2/11 (2) PHYSICS/ GR_EMI & AC

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

7. Two similar voltmeters with large resistance are connected in a loop as shown. Inside the loop, there is a
cylindrical region through which magnetic flux is distributed uniformly. The magnetic field increases
uniformly with time. The voltmeters are bidirectional i.e. the needle deflects to right if current in it flows from
+ terminal to – terminal and needle deflects to left if current in it flows from – terminal to + terminal. Which
of the following figures show the readings of voltmeters correctly :-

(A) (B)

(C) (D)

Rankers Academy JEE

8. A long solenoid contains another coaxial solenoid (whose radius R is half of its own). Their coils have same
numbers of turns per unit length and initially both carry no current. At any moment the current flowing in the
inner coil is twice as large as that in the outer one and their directions are the same. As a result of the
increasing current a charged particle initially at rest between the solenoids, starts moving along a circular
trajectory. The radius of the circular trajectory is :
(A) 5 (B) (C) 7 (D)
R √ 2R R √ 3R
4 6

PHYSICS/ GR_EMI & AC (3) E-3/11

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I(ii) : (Maximum Marks: 24)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 6 Q. [4 M (–2)]
9. A conducting ring is placed in a uniform external magnetic field present in the space within the ring and
perpendicular to plane of ring. The magnetic field changes at a constant rate due to which a current of
magnitude 4 amp flows in the ring. The resistance of parts PQR and PSR are 4 Ω and 8 Ω respectively. Then :-

(A) The emf induced in the ring 48 V

(B) Potential difference between P & R is 24 V
(C) Potential difference between P & R is 8V
(D) Potential difference between P & R is zero as conservative electric field in the ring wire is zero

Rankers Academy JEE

10. In figure the switch is closed at t = 0, with the capacitor of capacity 1 µF and having initial charge of
20 µC (the polarity shown). The left square loop has very large dimensions as compared to the distance
between loops and a resistance of 10 Ω is connected in series with capacitor as shown. A wire of length 8 mm
and resistance per unit length of 0.5 Ω /mm is bent in the form of square loop A and placed at a distance x = 1
m from left loop.

(A) The mutual inductance of the system will be 8 × 10 –13 H

(B) The induced current in the loop A will be clockwise
(C) The induced current in the loop A will be anticlockwise
(D) The induced current in the loop A at time t = 2RC ℓ n2 will be 10 –8 A

E-4/11 (4) PHYSICS/ GR_EMI & AC

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

11. A conducting rod PQ of length ℓ is dogged with a constant force F along two smooth parallel rails separated
by a distance ℓ as shown in the adjacent figure. Then choose the correct statement(s).

(A) terminal velocity of the rod, v = 2F R

t
B2 ℓ 2
(B) terminal velocity of the rod, vt = F2 R2
B ℓ
(C) maximum charge on the capacitor, q = F CR
max
Bℓ
(D) maximum charge on the capacitor, q 2F CR
max =
Bℓ
12. Growth of current in two different L-R circuits are depicted by the i-t graphs shown. Angle subtended by the
curves with time axis at time t = 0 are also shown in the graph. τ 1 and τ 2 are time constants for the circuits 1

Rankers Academy JEE

and 2 respectively. Choose the correct alternative

(A) τ 1 = 2
τ 2 3
(B) τ 1 = 3
τ2 2
(C) Initial rate of change of current for circuit-2 is 2 times that of circuit-1
(D) Initial rate of change of current for circuit-2 is 3 times that of circuit-1

PHYSICS/ GR_EMI & AC (5) E-5/11

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

13. In a circuit, alternating voltage with amplitude Uo = 100 V. is applied. The phase difference between current
and voltage through the source is equal φ = π /4. R = 100 Ohm and the inductance is resistance free. Take ω =
100 rad/s

(A) The amplitude of current is √ 2 amp.

(B) The average power dissipated is 50 W

(C) The inductance is 1H
(D) The amplitude of current through the inductance is 0.5 A
14. A very small circular loop of radius a is initially coplanar and concentric with a much larger circular loop of
radius b (>>a). A constant current I is passed in the large loop which is kept fixed in space and the small loop
is rotated with angular velocity ω about a diameter. The resistance of the small loop is R & its self inductance
is negligible. The current in the larger loop is clockwise. (Here θ is to be measured from axis of large ring)

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) π a2 μ 0 I ω sin ω t
The current in the small loop as a function of time is
2bR
(B) π a2 μ 0 I ω cos ω t
The current in the small loop as a function of time is
2bR
2
(C) π b2 μ 0 I sin ω t
Torque that must be exerted on the small loop to rotate it, is ω ( )
R 2b
2
(D) π a2 μ 0 I sin ω t
Torque that must be exerted on the small loop to rotate it, is ω ( )
R 2b

E-6/11 (6) PHYSICS/ GR_EMI & AC

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I(iii) : (Maximum Marks: 36)
Linked Comprehension Type (Single Option Correct) (3 Para × 2 Q.) (2 Para × 3 Q.) [3 M (–1)]
Paragraph for Questions 15 and 16
Figure shows a two branched parallel circuit with RA = 20 Ω , XL = 15 Ω , RB = 6 Ω and XC = 8 Ω . The total
current supplied by alternating source V is I = √29A.

15. Current passing through the inductor (XL) is :-

(A) Zero (B) 4A (C) 2A (D) 5A
16. Power dissipated in the circuit is :-
(A) Zero (B) 380 W (C) 920 W (D) 1400 W
Paragraph for Questions 17 and 18

Rankers Academy JEE

In the figure a small dielectric body of mass m carries charge q. The body lies at the end of a rod of length b,
having negligible mass. The other end of the rod is connected to a vertical shaft mounted on frictonless
bearings so that the rod is perpendicular to the shaft and thus free to swing in a horizontal plane. At time t =
0, the rod is at rest, and a uniform magnetic field is turned on whose magnitude increases linearly with time :
B = kt, where k is a constant. The direction of the field is parallel to the shaft.

17. What is the angular acceleration of the body about the shaft.
(A) α = qk (B) α = 2qk (C) α = qk (D) α = 2qk
2m m m 3m
18. What is the speed v of the body as a function of time ?
(A) v = 2qkbt (B) v = qkbt (C) v = 2qkbt (D) v = 2qkbt
2m 2m m 3m

PHYSICS/ GR_EMI & AC (7) E-7/11

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

Paragraph for Questions 19 - 21

A circuit shown in the figure in which k1 is closed and k2 is open. Inductor L can be connected to capacitor
C1 by closing switch k2 and opening k1.

19. Let switch k1 is closed and k2 is opened for long time. The charge on capacitor C2 will be :-
(A) 60 µC (B) 12 µC (C) 24 µC (D) 8 µC
20. At t = 0, when capacitors are fully charged, switch k1 is opened and switch k2 is closed, so that inductor is
connected in series with capacitor C1. The maximum charge will appear on capacitor C1 for first time after
time t = 0 is :-
(A) π (B) π (C) π (D) π
sec sec sec sec

Rankers Academy JEE

2000 1000 500 250
21. The maximum energy across inductor will be :-
(A) 0.144 mJ (B) 0.288 mJ (C) 0.072 mJ (D) None of these

E-8/11 (8) PHYSICS/ GR_EMI & AC

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

Paragraph for Questions 22 - 24

Portable electronic devices such as radios and compact disc players are often powered by direct current
supplied by batteries. Many devices come with AC-DC converters such as that shown in figure (i). Such a
converter contains a transformer that steps the voltage down from 120 V to, typically , 9V and a circuit that
converts alternating current to direct current. The AC-DC converting process is called rectification, and the
converting device is called a rectifier.

We can also design filters that respond differently to different frequencies. Consider the simple series RC
circuit shown in figure. The input voltage is across the series combination of the two elements. The output is
the voltage across the resistor.

Rankers Academy JEE

Now consider the circuit shown in figure, where we have interchanged the resistor and capacitor and where
the output voltage is taken across the capacitor. At low frequencies, the reactance of the capacitor and the
voltage across the capacitor is high. As the frequency increases, the voltage across the capacitor drops.
Therefore, this filter is an RC low-pass filter.

22. Consider the filter circuit shown in Figure (b), the ratio of the input, output voltage is :-
(A) Δ vin =
R (B) Δ vin =
R
Δ vout 2 Δ vout 2
√
R2 + ( ω1 C) √
R2 − ( ω1 C)

(C) Δ vout =
R (D) Δ vout =
R
Δ vin 2 Δ vin 2
√
R2 + ( ω1 C) √
R2 − ( ω1 C)

23. What value of Δ vout does approach as the frequency decreases toward zero ?
Δ vin
(A) 1 (B) 1 (C) 1 (D) Zero
2 4

PHYSICS/ GR_EMI & AC (9) E-9/11

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

24. Consider the filter circuit shown in figure (c). The ratio of the input, output voltage is :-
(A) Δ vout 1/ ω C (B) Δ vin 1/ ω C
= =
Δ vin 2 Δ vout 2
√
R2 + ( ω1 C) √
R2 − ( ω1 C)

(C) Δ vout 1/ ω C (D) Δ vin 1/ ω C

= =
Δ vin 2 Δ vout 2
√
R2 − ( ω1 C) √
R2 + ( ω1 C)

Paragraph for Questions 25 and 26

If a conductor is accelerated, initially the free electrons lag behind, thus setting up an electric field in the conductor.
In steady state this field exerts force on free electrons and make them accelerate along with the conductor.
(Historically this was used by Tolman-Stewant in 1916 for their experiments to measure charge to mass ratio).
25. If the above rod accelerates with acceleration along rod length and vA and vB are potential of end A and B
respectively, then

(A) Potential of point A is less than that of B

(B) Potential of point B is less than that of A

Rankers Academy JEE

(C) A constant electric field appears in the rod from B to A
(D) A constant electric field appears in the rod from A to B
26. Figure shows a rod AB that can rotate with uniform angular velocity ω over a stationary conducting circular
frame and resistance R is connected between centre A and frame.

(A) If the current was found to be I then the charge to mass ratio of electrons would be ω 2 ℓ 2
2IR
(B) If the current was found to be I then the charge to mass ratio of electrons would be 2ω2 ℓ2
IR
(C) If a magnetic field B is applied perpendicular to plane of the paper then induce current (due
1 Bℓ2 ω
to motional emf only) in rod will be
2 R
(D) If a magnetic field B is applied perpendicular to plane of the paper then induce current in rod will
be radially outward

E-10/11 (10) PHYSICS/ GR_EMI & AC

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-III : (Maximum Marks: 16)
Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 4 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. Two coaxial long solenoids of equal lengths have current i1, i2, number of turns per unit length n1, n2 and
radius 3m, 5m respectively. If n1i1 = n2i2 = 250 (in SI unit) and the two solenoids carry current in opposite
sense. Find the magnetic energy stored per unit length (in SI unit). (Take π 2 = 10)
2. A loop is formed by two parallel conductors connected by a solenoid with inductance L = 2H and a
conducting rod of mass m = 80 g, which can freely (without friction) slide over the conductors. The conductors
are located in a horizontal plane in a uniform vertical magnetic field with induction B = 4T. The distance
between the conductors is equal to ℓ = 4cm. At the moment t = 0 the rod is imparted an initial velocity v0 = 2
cm/s directed to the right. Find the amplitude (in cm) for the oscillations of conducting rod, if the electric
resistance of the loop is negligible.

3. A disc of radius r is made of a material of negligible resistance and can rotate about a horizontal shaft. A
smaller disc of radius ρ is fixed onto the same shaft and has a massless cord wrapped around it, which is

Rankers Academy JEE

attached to a small object of mass m as shown. Two ends of a resistor of resistance R are connected to the
perimeter of the disc and to the shaft by wiping contacts. The system is then placed into a uniform horizontal
magnetic field B and mass m is released. Find the constant angular velocity (in rad/s) with which the disc will
rotate after a certain time. If your answer is ω give value of ω . Data : r = 10 cm, ρ = 2 cm, R = 0.01 Ω , B =
20
0.2 T, m = 50 g.

4. A ring of a rectangular cross section (see figure) is made of a material whose resistivity is ρ . The ring is placed
in a homogeneous magnetic field. The intensity of the magnetic field is directed along the axis of the ring and
xkh 2 2
increases directly with times, B = kt. The current induced in the ring is (b − a ). Find the value of x.
8ρ

PHYSICS/ GR_EMI & AC (11) E-11/11

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
ANSWER KEY GR_EMI & AC
PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SECTION-I(i)
A. C B C B B D A B
Q. 9 10 11 12 13 14
SECTION-I(ii)
A. A,C A,B,D B,C B,D A,B,C A,D

Q. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A. C B A B C C A A D A
SECTION-I(iii)
Q. 25 26

A. A,C A,C
Q. 1 2 3 4
SECTION-III
A. 2 5 5 2

Rankers Academy JEE

(12)
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_Damped & Forced Oscillations
SECTION-I(i) (Maximum Marks:45)
Single Correct Answer Type 15 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. The differential equation governing the vibrating system is shown in diagram where c is a viscous damper with
damping coefficient c. Select the correct equation of motion.

(A) mx¨ + cx˙ + k(x − y) = 0 (B) m(x¨ − y)

¨ + c(x˙ − y)
˙ + kx = 0

(C) mx¨ + c(x˙ − y)

˙ + kx = 0 (D) m(x¨ − y)
¨ + c(x˙ − y)k(x
˙ − y) = 0

2. In a forced vibration with viscous damping, maximum amplitude occurs when forced frequency is:
(A) equal to natural frequency. (B) slightly less than natural frequency.
(C) slightly greater than natural frequency. (D) zero
3. A vibrating system consists of a mass 12.5 kg, a spring with stiffness 1000 N/m and a dashpot with damping
factor of 15 N-s/m. The value of critical damping of the system is:

4. Rankers Academy JEE

(A) 0.223 Ns/m (B) 17.88 Ns/m (C) 71.4 Ns/m (D) 223.6 Ns/m
The amplitude versus time curve of as damped-free vibration is shown in the below figure. Curve labelled ‘A’ is :

(A) a longarithmic decrement curve. (B) an exponentially decreasing curve.

(C) a hyperbolic curve. (D) a linear curve.
5. When the mass of a critically damped single degree of freedom system is deflected from its equilibrium
position and released, it will
(A) return to equilibrium position without oscillation. (B) oscillate with increasing time period.
(C) oscillate with decreasing amplitude. (D) oscillate with constant amplitude.
6. If a spring-mass-dashpot system is subjected to excitation by a constant harmonic force, then at resonance, its
amplitude of vibration will be:
(A) infinity (B) inversely proportion to damping
(C) directly proportional to damping (D) decreasing exponentially with time.

PHYSICS/ GR_Damped & Forced Oscillations (1) E-1/4

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

7. In a spring-mass system, the mass 0.1 kg and the stiffness of the spring is 1 kN/m. By introducing a damper,
the frquency of oscillation is found to be 90% of the original value. What is the damping factor of the damper?
(A) 1.2 N.s/m (B) 3.4 N.s/m (C) 8.7 N.s/m (D) 12.0 N.s/m
8. The figure below shows the schematic of an automobile having a mass of 900 kg and the suspension spring
constant of 81 × 104 N/m. If it travels at a speed of 72 km/hr on a rough road with periodic waviness as shown,
what is the forcing frequency of the road on the wheel?

(A) 10 Hz (B) 4 Hz (C) 1.5 Hz (D) 20 Hz

9. An LCR circuit having a resistor of 20 Ω and inductive reactance is 200 H. After how many oscillations the
1

Rankers Academy JEE

ratio of current to its maximum value will become ?
e
(A) 10 (B) 10 (C) 100 (D) 100
π π
10. A spring mass system executes damped harmonic oscillations given by the equation y = Ae− sin ( ω ′ t + ϕ )
bt
2m

where the symbols have their usual meanings.

If a 2 kg mass (m) is attached to a spring of force constant (K) 1250 N/m, the period of the oscillation is
( π /12)s. The damping constant ‘b’ has the value.
(A) 9.8 kg/s (B) 2.8 kg/s (C) 98 kg/s (D) 28 kg/s
11. A simple pendulum of length 1m (consider π 2 = g) has a time period T when there is no air resistance. If a
small air resistance is present during oscillation than :-
(A) The time period will be initially more than 2s and decreases with time.
(B) The time period will be less than 4s initially and increases with time
(C) The time period will be greater than 4s and decrease with time
(D) The time period will be more than 2s and remains constant.
12. A small ball connected to a thread is submerged in a liquid and made to oscillate like a simple pendulum. The
time period is T1 if we consider buoyant force as well as viscous force . If there is no viscous force but there is
a buoyant force, the time period is T2 :
(A) T1 can be equal to T2 (B) T1 is always equal to T2
(C) T1 > T2 (D) T1 < T2

E-2/4 (2) PHYSICS/ GR_Damped & Forced Oscillations

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

13. Critical damping is the

(A) largest amount of damping for which no oscillation occurs in free vibration
(B) smallest amount of damping for which no oscillation occurs in free vibration
(C) largest amount of damping for which the motion is simple harmonic in free vibration.
(D) smallest amount of damping for which the motion is simple harmonic in free vibration
14. Which of the following statements are TRUE for damped vibrations?
(P) For a system having critical damping, the system does not undergo a vibratory motion.
(Q) Logarithmic decrement method is used to determine the amount do damping in a physical system.
(R) In case of damping due to dry friction between moving surfaces resisting force of constant magnitude acts
opposite to the relative motion.
(S) For the case of viscous damping, drag force is directly proportional to the square of relative velocity.
(A) P and Q only (B) P and S only (C) P, Q and R only (D) Q and S only
15. A thin strip 10 cm long is on a U shaped wire of negligible resistance and it is connected to a spring of spring
constant 0.5 Nm –1 (see figure). The assembly is kept in a uniform magnetic field of 0.1 T. If the strip is pulled
from its equilibrium position and released, the number of oscillation it performs before its amplitude decreases
by a factor of e is N. If the mass of the strip is 50 grams, its resistance 10 Ω and air drag negligible, N will be

Rankers Academy JEE

close to :

(A) 50000 (B) 5000 (C) 10000 (D) 1000

SECTION-I(ii) : (Maximum Marks: 8)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 2 Q. [4 M (–2)]
16. A Harmonic oscillator is represented by the equation d 2 x dx
m +γ + kx = 0 With m = 0.25 kg, γ = 0.070 kg/s
dt2 dt
and k = 85 N/m. For the given harmonic oscillator.
(A) The time period of oscillation is nearly 0.34 sec.
(B) The number of oscillations in which its mechanical energy will drop to one-half of its initial value
is approximately 7.
(C) The number of oscillations in which its mechanical energy will drop to one-half of its initial value
is approximately 14.
(D) Quality factor of the oscillator is close to 66.

PHYSICS/ GR_Damped & Forced Oscillations (3) E-3/4

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

17. A block of mass 1 kg is connected to a horizontal spring of spring constant 100 N/m. The system is made to
oscillate in the horizontal direction by oscillating the support point of the spring with an angular frequency of
20 rad/sec and an amplitude of 10 cm. (There is negligible damping)
(A) The amplitude of oscillation of the mass is 3.33 cm
(B) The amplitude of oscillation of the mass is 5 cm
(C) The block oscillates in the same phase as the support point.
(D) The block oscillates with a phase difference of 180° with the support point.

SECTION-I(iii) : (Maximum Marks: 6)

Linked Comprehension Type (Single Option Correct) 1 Para × 2 Q. [3 M (–1)]

Paragraph for Questions 18 and 19

A uniform rigid slender bar of mass 10 kg, hinged at the left end is suspended with the help of spring and
damper arrangement as shown in the figure where K = 2 kN/m, C = 500 Ns/m and the stiffness of the
torsional spring Ke is 1 kN /m/rad. Ignore the hinge dimensions.

Rankers Academy JEE

18. The undamped natural frequency of oscillators of the bar about the hinge point is
(A) 42.43 rad/s (B) 30 rad/s (C) 17.32 rad/s (D) 14.14 rad/s

19. The damping coefficient in the vibration equation is given by

(A) 500 Nms/rad (B) 500 N/(m/s) (C) 80 Nms/rad (D) 80 N/(m/s)

E-4/4 (4) PHYSICS/ GR_Damped & Forced Oscillations

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

SECTION-II : (Maximum Marks: 12)

Linked Comprehension Type (Upto Second Decimal Place) 1 Para × 2 Q. [4 M (0)]

Paragraph for Questions 1 and 2

The energy of recoil of a rocket launcher of mass m = 4500 kg is absorbed in a recoil spring. At the end of the
recoil, a damping dashpoot is arranged in such a way that the launcher returns to the firing positin without
any oscillation (critical damping). The launcher recoils by a distance of 3m with an initial speed of 10 ms –1.

1. Find the recoil's spring constant (in kN/m)

2. Find the dashpot's coefficient of critical damping. (in kNs m –1) [Given kN = 1000 N]
3. In a spring-mass system, the mass is m and the spring constant is k. The critical damping coefficient of the
system is 0.1 kg/s. In another spring-mass system, the mass is 2 m and the spring constant is 8 k. The critical
damping coefficient (in kg/s) of this system is

Rankers Academy JEE

E-4/4 (5) PHYSICS/ GR_Damped & Forced Oscillations

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
ANSWER KEY GR_Damped & Forced Oscillations
PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A. C B D B A B C B B D
SECTION-I(i)
Q. 11 12 13 14 15
A. D C B C B

Q. 16 17
SECTION-I(ii)
A. A,B,D A,D
Q. 18 19
SECTION-I(iii)
A. A D
Q. 1 2 3
SECTION-II
A. 50.00 30.00 0.4

Rankers Academy JEE

(6)
Rankers Academy JEE

(7)
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_WAVE ON A STRING
SECTION-I(i) (Maximum Marks:27)
Single Correct Answer Type 9 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. A traveling wave is of the form y (x,t) = A cos (kx – ω t) + B sin (kx – ω t), which can also be written as y
(x,t) = D sin (kx – ω t – ϕ ) where
(A) D = A + B (B) D = |A + B| (C) D2 = A2 + B2 (D) D = A – B
2. A thin string with linear density µ is joined to a thick string with linear density 2µ. A incident pulse is sent
down the thin string toward the thick string and eventually creates reflected and transmitted pulses. Which of
the following is true ?
(A) The reflected and transmitted pulses are both inverted.
(B) Neither the reflected nor transmitted pulses are inverted.
(C) The reflected pulse is inverted, but the transmitted pulse is not inverted.
(D) The transmitted pulse is inverted, but the reflected pulse is not inverted.
3. Here given snap shot of a progressive wave at t = 0 with time period = T. Then the equation of the wave if
wave is going in +ve x-direction and if wave is going in – ve x-direction will be respectively.

Rankers Academy JEE

2π
( Here, T = )
ω

(A) y = A sin (kx + ω t), y = A sin (kx – ω t) (B) y = A cos (kx + ω t), y = A cos (kx – ω t)
(C) y = A sin ( ω t – kx), y = A sin ( ω t + kx) (D) y = A sin (kx – ω t), y = A sin (kx + ω t)
4. A progressive wave is travelling in a string as shown. Then which of the following statement about KE and
potential energy of the elements A and B is true?

(A) For point A : kinetic energy is maximum and potential energy is min.
(B) For point B : kinetic energy is minimum and potential energy is min.
(C) For point A : kinetic energy is minimum and potential energy is max.
(D) For point B : kinetic energy is minimum and potential energy is max.

PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE ON A STRING (1) E-1/6

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

5. A string consists of two parts attached at x = 0. The right part of the string (x > 0) has mass μ r per unit length
and the left part of the string (x < 0) has mass μ ℓ per unit length. The string tension is T. If a wave of unit
amplitude travels along the left part of the string, as shown in the figure, what is the amplitude of the wave that
is transmitted to the right part of the string ?

(B) 2 (C) 2√ μ ℓ / μ r (D) √ μ ℓ /μr − 1

(A) 1
1+ √ μ ℓ /μr 1 + √μ ℓ /μr μ ℓ /μr + 1
√

6. π
Five waveforms moving with equal speeds on the x-axis y1 = 8 sin ( ω t + kx) ; y2 = 6 sin ( ω t + 2 + kx) ; y3 =
3π
4 sin ( ω t + π + kx) ; y4 = 2 sin ( ω t + + kx); y5 = 4√2 sin ( ω t – kx + π ) are superimposed on each other.
2 4
The resulting wave is :
π
(A) 8√2 cos kx sin ( ω t + ) (B) 8√2 sin ( ω t – kx + π )
4 4
(C) π
8√2 sin kx cos ( ω t + ) (D) 8 sin ( ω t + kx)
4
7. The wave function of a triangular wave pulse is defined by the relation below at time t = 0 sec.

Rankers Academy JEE

The wave pulse is moving in the +X direction in a string having tension T and mass per unit length μ . The
total energy present with the wave pulse is :-
(A) m2 T a (B) m2Ta (C) mTa (D) mT a
2 2
8. A plane progressive harmonic wave is given by the equation : φ = φ msin(2t – 3x + 4y + π /3), where x and y
are in meters, and t is in seconds. Let n^ is the unit vector in the direction of wave propagation, and v is the
speed of wave w.r.t. the wave medium, then :-
(A) 3^ 4^ (B) 4^ 3^ 2
n^ = − i + j ; v = 0.4 m/s n^ = i − j ; v = m/s
5 5 5 5 3
(C) 3 4 (D) 4 3
n^ = i^ − j^ ; v = 0.4 m/s n^ = − i^ + j^ ; v = 0.5 m/s
5 5 5 5
9. The vibrations of a string of length 600 cm fixed at both ends are represented by the equation y = 4 sin π x ( )
15
cos (96 π t), where x and y are in cm and t in second. What is the maximum displacement at a point at x=5
cm?
(A) √ 3 cm (B) 2 √ 3 cm (C) 3 √ 3 cm (D) 4 √ 3 cm

E-2/6 (2) PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE ON A STRING

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I(ii) : (Maximum Marks: 36)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 9 Q. [4 M (–2)]
10. The figures represent two snaps of a travelling wave on a string of mass per unit length, µ = 0.25 kg/m. The
1
two snaps are taken at time t = 0 and at t = s. Then the possible solution for wave are :
24

(A) speed of wave is 4 m/s.

(B) the tension in the string is 4 N
(C) the equation of the wave is y = 10 sin π x − 4 π t + π
( )
6
(D) the maximum velocity of the particle = π m/s
25
11. y (x, t) = 0.8/[(4x + 5t)2 + 5] represents a moving pulse, where x & y are in meter and t in second. Then:

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) pulse is moving in +x direction
(C) its maximum displacement is 0.16 m
(B) in 2s it will travel a distance of 2.5 m
(D) it is a symmetric pulse.
12. A string of mass 0.2 kg and length 2m is tied at two ends to fixed supports under a tension of 10 N. A point P
on the string is found to travel from one extreme to other in 0.1s. Taking one end as x = 0 and the other end x =
2m and t = 0 as the time when P is at rest. (Position of P is x). The correct statements will be
(A) For 0 < t < 0.1 s, energy flows across P in positive x-direction for 0 < x < 1 m
(B) For 0 < t < 0.05 s, energy flows across P in negative x-direction for 0 < x < 1 m
(C) At t = 0.05 s, rate of energy flow through P is zero for x = 0.5 m
(D) At t = 0.1s, rate of energy flow through P for all values of x is zero
13. String of length L whose one end is at x = 0, vibrates according to the relations given by different equations.
Choose the correct statement(s).
(A) π x sin ω t
y = A sin has 1 antinodes, 2 nodes
L
(B) πx
y = A cos sin ω t has 2 antinodes, 1 nodes
L
(C) 2πx
y = A sin sin ω t has 3 nodes, 2 antinodes
L
(D) 2πx
y = A cos sin ω t has 3 antinodes, 2 nodes
L
PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE ON A STRING (3) E-3/6
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

14. A wave disturbance in a medium is described by y (x, t) = 0.02 cos (50 π t + π /2) cos (10 π x), where x and y
are in metres and t in seconds.
(A) A node occurs at x = 0.15 m (B) An antinode occurs at x = 0.3 m
(C) The speed of the wave is 5.0 m/s (D) The wavelength is 0.2 m
15. A waveform : y1 = A sin 2x − 4t + π is superposed with a second waveform, to produce a standing wave
( )
3
with a node at x = 0. The equation of the second waveform can be :-
(A) y = A sin 5π (B) y2 = A sin π
2 ( 2x + 4t + ) (2x − 4t + )
3 3
(C) y2 = A sin (2x + 4t −
π) (D) y2 = A sin (2x + 4t +
π)
3 3
st
16. A string fixed at both ends and under tension T vibrates in its 1 overtone with an amplitude A at the
antinodes. The total energy of the string is E and the maximum possible speed of a particle of the string is v. If
the same string were to vibrate in its fundamental mode under a tension 4T and with an amplitude A at the
antinode then :-
(A) The total energy of the string will be E
(B) The total energy of the string will be 2E

Rankers Academy JEE

(C) The maximum possible speed of a particle on the string is v
(D) The maximum possible speed of a particle on the string is 2v
17. A long wire ABC is made by joining two wires AB and BC of equal cross-sectional area. AB has length 4.80
m and mass 0.12 kg. BC has length 2.56 m and mass 0.4 kg. The wire ABC is under a tension of 160 N. A
sinusoidal wave y = 5.6 (cm) sin ( ω t – kx) is sent along the wire ABC from the end A. No power dissipates
during the propagation of the wave.

(A) The amplitude of the reflected wave is 2.4 cm

(B) The amplitude of transmitted wave is 3.2. cm
(C) The maximum displacement of the nodes of the stationary wave in the wire AB is 3.2 cm
(D) The fraction of power transmitted from the junction B is approximately 0.816
18. In a travelling one dimensional mechanical sinusoidal wave
(A) potential energy and kinetic energy of an element become maximum simultaneously.
(B) all particles oscillate with the same frequency and the same amplitude
(C) all particles may come to rest simultaneously
(D) we can find two particles, in a length equal to half of a wavelength, which have the same non
zero acceleration simultaneously.
E-4/6 (4) PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE ON A STRING
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I(iii) : (Maximum Marks: 24)
Linked Comprehension Type (Single Option Correct) (2 Para × 3 Q.) (1 Para × 2 Q.) [3 M (–1)]
Paragraph for Questions 19 - 21
A harmonic oscillator at x = 0, oscillates with a frequency ω and amplitude a. It is generating waves at end
2π
of a thin string in which velocity of wave is v1 and which is connected to another heavier string in which
velocity of wave is v2 as shown, length of first string is ℓ .

19. If harmonic oscillator oscillates by an equation y = a sin ω t. The equation of incident wave in first string is
(A) y = a sin ω t − x
( )
(B) y = a sin ω t + x ( )
v1 v1
(C) y = a sin[ ω (t −
x
) + π]
(D) y = a sin[ ω (t +
x
) + π]
v1 v1
20. Equation of transmitted wave in second string if its amplitude is at is
(A) y = a sin ω t − x (B) y = a sin ω ℓ
t−

Rankers Academy JEE

t ( ) t ( )
v2 v1
(C) ℓ x− ℓ (D) x
y = at sin ω (t − − ) y = at sin ω (t − )
v1 v2 v2
21. Equation of reflected wave, if it is reflecting at the joint and amplitude of reflected wave is aR
(A) y = a sin ω t − x (B) y = a sin ω t − ℓ − ℓ − x + π
R ( ) R [ ( ) ]
v2 v1 v1
(C) x (D) 2ℓ + x
y = aR sin[ ω (t + ) + π] y = aR sin[ ω (t + ) + π]
v1 v1

Paragraph for Questions 22 - 24

A 2m string has tension 1N is fixed at both end and its is vibrating in its third harmonic with antinode
amplitude 3 cm and frequency 100 Hz, then
22. Possible stationary wave equation for the vibration of the string will be (assume origin at left end of the string
and x is measured in meters towards right and t is measured in seconds)
(A) y = (0.06 m) sin 3 π x cos (200 π t)
( )
(B) y = (0.03 m) sin 3 π x cos (200 π t) ( )
2 4
(C) y = (0.06 m) sin 3π (D) y = (0.03 m) sin 3π
( x) cos (200 π t) ( x) cos (200 π t)
4 2
23. Total wave energy on the string will be nearly equal to
(A) 40 mJ (B) 10 mJ (C) 30 mJ (D) 20 mJ
24. At what time from the start (by the answer of first question in this paragraph) string will have maximum
kinetic energy first time (second)
(A) 1 (B) 1 (C) 1 (D) 1
200 100 400 800
PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE ON A STRING (5) E-5/6
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

Paragraph for Questions 25 and 26

A suspension bridge consists of a pair of cables hung between two towers with the roadway suspended from
these cables by means of closely spaced vertical wires of negligible mass as shown in figure. Each flexible
cable of length ℓ (> L) and mass m hangs between two poles and mass of roadway section is M distributed
uniformly along length L. At the ends, the cable makes an angle of α with the walls. (Assume each cable
bears equal load and M>>m)

25. The shape of any cable is best describe by equation assuming center of a cable is origin, vertical direction is
taken as positive y-axis and horizontal right taken as positive x-axis?
(A) y = cot α (B) y = tan α (C) y = tan α (D) y = cot α
x2 x2 x2 x2
2L 2L L L

Rankers Academy JEE

26. If a small amplitude transverse pulse is passed through the cable, what is the speed of transverse waves at the
middle ?
(A) 1 √ Mg ℓ tan α (B) √
Mg ℓ tan α (C) 1 √ Mg ℓ cot α (D) √
Mg ℓ cot α
2 m m 2 m m
SECTION-II : (Maximum Marks: 12)
Numerical Answer type Questions (Upto Second Decimal Place) 3 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. A steel of wire of length 25 cm is fixed at its ends to rigid walls. Young’s modulus of steel = 200 GPa,
coefficient of linear thermal expansion = 10 –5 / °C. Initially, the wire is just taut at 20°C temperature. The
density of steel = 8.0 g/cc. A tuning fork of frequency 200 Hz is touched to the wire, to execute oscillations.
Simultaneously, the temperature is slowly lowered. At what temperature (in °C) will resonance occur
corresponding to the third overtone?
2. A string of length ℓ is fixed at both ends. It is vibrating in its 3rd overtone with maximum amplitude a = 2 √ 3

mm. Find the square of amplitude (in mm2) at a distance ℓ from one end.
3
3. A string will break apart if it is placed under too much tensile stress. One type of steel has density. ρ steel = 104
kg/m3 and breaking stress σ = 9 × 108 N/m2. We make a guitar string from (4 π ) gram of this type of steel. It
should be able to withstand (900 π )N without breaking. What is highest possible fundamental frequency (in
Hz) of standing waves on the string if the entire length of the string vibrates.

E-6/6 (6) PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE ON A STRING

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
ANSWER KEY GR_WAVE ON A STRING
PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SECTION-I(i)
A. C C D B C A B C B
Q. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
SECTION-I(ii)
A. A,B,C,D B,C,D C,D A,B,C,D A,B,C,D A,C A,C A,B,C,D A,B,D

Q. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
SECTION-I(iii)
A. A C B D B C D A
Q. 1 2 3
SECTION-II
A. 17.5 9.00 375.00

Rankers Academy JEE

(7)
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_SOUND WAVE
SECTION-I(i) (Maximum Marks:27)
Single Correct Answer Type 9 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. The speed of sound in neon (Ne) at a certain temperature is V ms –1. The speed of sound in hydrogen (H2) at
the same temperature will be (assume both gases to be ideal)
(A) (B) (D) V
V= √
42
ms –1 V √
5
ms –1 (C) V √ 5 ms –1 ms –1
5 42 √ 5
2. In the Kundts tube experiment (shown in fig. (i)), the rod is clamped at the end instead of clamping it at the
center as shown in fig. (ii). It is known that speed of sound in air is 330 m/s, powder piles up at successive
distance of 0.6 m and length of rod used is 1m, speed of sound in rod is

(A) 550 m/s (B) 1100 m/s (C) 1200 m/s (D) 600 m/s

Rankers Academy JEE

3. Two identical wires under the same tension have a fundamental frequency of 500 Hz. The fractional increase
in the tension of one wire will give 5 beats per second, is :-
(A) 0.01 (B) 0.02 (C) 0.03 (D) 0.04
4. A sonometer has two strings stretched side by side parallel to each other. The two strings are made of the same
metal and have uniform cross-sections of radii r1 and r2 respectively with r1 : r2 :: 2 : 3. The two strings are
each of length 1m and are loaded by identical weights. The first string is made to oscillate with six loops in its
length. How many loops will be seen on the second string when it resonates with the first string?
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 9 (D) 6
5. Statement – 1 : When a closed organ pipe vibrates, the pressure of the gas at the closed end remains constant.
Statement – 2 : In a stationary – wave system, displacement nodes are pressure antinodes, and displacement
antinodes are pressure nodes.
(A) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is True ; Statement – 2 is a correct explanation for Statement – 1.
(B) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is True ; Statement – 2 is not a correct explanation for Statement – 1.
(C) Statement – 1 is True, Statement – 2 is False.
(D) Statement–1 is False, Statement–2 is True.

PHYSICS/ GR_SOUND WAVE (1) E-1/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

6. A bird is singing on a tree and a man is hearing at a distance ‘r’ from the bird. Calculate the displacement of
the man towards the bird so that the loudness heard by man increases by 20 dB.
[Assume that the motion of man is along the line joining the bird and the man]
(A) 9r (B) r (C) 3r (D) 4r
10 10 5 5
7. A source is moving with a constant speed u on a straight line, emitting a sound of frequency f0. There are three
observers A, B and C. A on track, B at a perpendicular distance of d from the track and C at a perpendicular
distance of 2d form the track as shown in the figure. The variation of the observed frequency with respect to
the position x,

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) A – 3, B – 2, C – 1 (B) A – 2, B – 3, C – 1
(C) A – 1, B – 2, C – 3 (D) A – 1, B – 3, C – 2
8. If y1 = 5 (mm) sin π t is equation of oscillation of source S1 and y2 = 5 (mm) sin( π t + π /6) be that of S2 and it
takes 1 sec and ½ sec for the transverse waves to reach point A from sources S1 and S2 respectively then the
resulting amplitude at point A, is

(A) 5√2 + √3 mm (B) 5√3 mm (C) 5 mm (D) 5√2 mm

9. Two loudspeakers are emitting sound waves of wavelength λ with an initial phase difference of π . At what
2
minimum distance from O on line AB will one hear a maxima ?

(B) 100 λ (C) 25 λ

(A) 25 λ (D) 50 λ
√ 15 3

E-2/8 (2) PHYSICS/ GR_SOUND WAVE

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I(ii) : (Maximum Marks: 32)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 8 Q. [4 M (–2)]
10. A small source of sound operates at 1kHz, 24 π W emitting sound uniformly in all directions. The speed of
sound is 360m/s in air and density of air is 1.2kg/m3.
(A) The intensity of sound at a distance 10m from the source is 0.06W/m2
(B) The intensity of sound at a distance 10m from the source is 0.24W/m2
(C) The pressure amplitude at distance 10m is 7.2 Pa
(D) The pressure amplitude at distance 10m is 28.8 Pa
11. In a resonance column experiment, the length of air column at 1st resonance is measured to be 13.1 cm with a
possible indeterminate error of 0.1 cm. With the same scale, the 2nd resonance occurs at 39.2 cm. The possible
wavelength of the sound can be :
(A) 52.2 cm (B) 52.4 cm (C) 52.5 cm (D) 51. 9 cm
12. A narrow steel rod of length ‘L’ is rigidly clamped at its mid-point and transverse standing waves of frequency
‘f’ are set up in it. The speed of transverse waves in the rod is ‘c’.Then,

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) The free ends of the rod must be antinodes.
(B) The fundamental frequency of the rod is c/(L)
(C) The second overtone frequency of the rod is 5c/(2L)
(D) ‘f’ can be any integral multiple of the fundamental frequency.
13. A stationary observer receives a sound of frequency f0 = 2000 Hz when the source is at rest. When the source
starts moving with a constant velocity starting from a large distance, the apparent frequency f varies with time
as shown in figure. Speed of sound = 300 m/s. Choose the correct alternative (s):-

(A) Speed of source is 66.7 m/s.

(B) fm shown in figure can be 2500 Hz.
(C) Speed of source is 33.33 m/s.
(D) fm shown in figure cannot be greater than 2250 Hz.

PHYSICS/ GR_SOUND WAVE (3) E-3/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

14. Choose the incorrect one

(A) When an ultrasonic wave travels from air into water, it bends towards the normal to the air water
interface
(B) Any function of the form y(x, t) = f(vt + x) represents a travelling wave
(C) The velocity, wavelength and frequency of wave undergo change when it is reflected from a surface
(D) None of the above
15. A person blows into open-end of a long pipe. As a result, a high-pressure pulse of air travels down the pipe.
When this pulse reaches the other end of the pipe.
(A) a high-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if the other end of the pipe is open
(B) a low -pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if the other end of the pipe is open
(C) a low pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if the other end of the pipe is closed
(D) a high-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if the other end of the pipe is closed
16. An open organ pipe of length 24 cm and an organ pipe closed at one end of length 38 cm have the same
diameter. It is found that the 1st overtone of closed pipe is in unison with the fundamental of the open pipe.
The velocity of sound in air is 340 ms –1 . Choose the CORRECT statement(s)

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) The end-correction at each open end is 1cm
(B) the fundamental frequency of the open pipe is nearly 654 Hz
(C) The frequency of 2nd harmonic of open pipe will be twice its fundamental frequency
(D) The frequency of 2nd harmonic of open pipe will be less than twice its fundamental frequency.
17. Mark the CORRECT statement (s) :-
(A) When two waves of different frequency f1 and f2 are superimposed at a point, the variation of
intensity takes place with frequency f1 – f2
(B) When an observer is moving, relative speed of the sound waves with respect to the observer is
changed, while due to motion of source, the sound wavelength of the wave changes.
(C) When a high pressure compression pulse reaches water surface in a resonance column, it reflects as
a low pressure rarefraction pulse due to a phase change of π
(D) When a tuning fork is struck by a hammer a transverse wave sets in the prong while a longitudinal
wave sets in the stem (handle) of tuning fork

E-4/8 (4) PHYSICS/ GR_SOUND WAVE

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I(iii) : (Maximum Marks: 21)
Linked Comprehension Type (Single Option Correct) (1 Para × 4 Q.) (1 Para × 3 Q.) [3 M (–1)]
Paragraph for Questions 18 - 21
Imagine that you are in Indian army and you have been given charge of commanding parade on 26th January.
The soldiers have done extensive training on march past with a band which strikes 120 times/min. The soldier
should strike left foot or right foot at each drum beat so that parade marches at 120 steps/min.
On the day of parade, there are 2 parts. In 1st part, the band marches ahead of the soldiers with same speed as
that of soldiers. In this march, you notice that the soldiers in the first row strike left foot but the soldiers in
last row strike right foot at the same time. Unfortunately, the general also notices this.
In the 2nd part, you hope & pray that everything goes well. In this part, the band is stationary but the soldiers
advance towards the band at same constant speed. Here again, you notice that the soldiers in the parade are
doing 121 steps/min. As before, the general notices this.
A court martial is due for you. You frantically try to look for an explanation. One of your friends reminds you
of your old physics teacher at Allen. You turn to him for solace. He suggests two things for defence.
(a) Sound takes time to reach from one place to another.
(b) doppler’s effect
Assume that it was chilly winter & speed of sound = 320 m/sec.

Rankers Academy JEE

18. Select the correct explanation for mistakes in each part.
(A) part I → a, part II → b (B) part I → a, part II → a
(C) part I → b, part II → a (D) part I → b, part II → b
19. What can be the length of the column of soldiers marching past.
(A) 320 m (B) 160 m (C) 80 m (D) 40 m
20. What is the speed of the soldiers.
(A) 1.0 m/s (B) 2.0 m/s (C) 1.5 m/s (D) 2.5 m/s
21. What will be the marching speed of the soldiers when they turn around & march away from the band in part 2 ?
(A) 120 steps/min. (B) 119 steps/min. (C) 121 steps/min. (D) 110 steps/min.

PHYSICS/ GR_SOUND WAVE (5) E-5/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

Paragraph for Questions 22 - 24

The Doppler flow meter is a particularly interesting medical application of the Doppler effect. This device
measures the speed of blood flow, using transmitting and receiving elements that are placed directly on the
skin, as in Figure. The transmitter emits a continuous sound whose frequency is typically about 5 MHz. When
the sound is reflected from the red blood cells, its frequency is changed in a kind of Doppler effect because
the cells are moving with the same velocity as the blood. The receiving element detects the reflected sound,
and an electronic counter measures its frequency, which is Doppler-shifted relative to the transmitter
frequency. From the change in frequency the speed of the blood flow can be determined. Typically, the
change in frequency is around 600 Hz for flow speeds of about 0.1 m/s.

Rankers Academy JEE

22. Assume that the red blood cell is directly moving away from the source and the receiver. What is the (approx)
speed of the sound wave in the blood?
(A) 1700 m/s (B) 330 m/s (C) 5000 m/s (D) 3000 m/s
23. An abnormal segment of the artery is narrowed down by an arteriosclerotic plaque to one-fourth the normal
cross-sectional area. What will be the change in frequency due to reflection from the red blood cell in that
region?
(A) 150 Hz (B) 300 Hz (C) 600 Hz (D) 2400 Hz
24. At what extra rate does the heart have to work due to this narrowing down of the artery? Assume the density to
be 1.5 gm/cc and the area of the normal artery to be 0.1 cm2.
(A) 1.125 × 10 –4 W (B) 2.5 × 10 –4 W (C) 6.25 × 10 –5 W (D) 5.625 × 105 W

E-6/8 (6) PHYSICS/ GR_SOUND WAVE

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-II (i) : (Maximum Marks: 8)
Linked Comprehension Type (Upto Second Decimal Place) 1 Para × 2 Q. [4 M (0)]
Paragraph for Questions 1 and 2
A point isotropic sonic source of sound power 1 milli watts emits sound of frequency 170 Hz in all directions.
1. 50x
The distance of a point from the source where the loudness level is 60 dB is √ . Find the value of x. [Take
π
vs = 340 m/s]
2. It is known that at some moment t = 0, the displacement of air particles at a certain point 4 m away from the
source is A. The amplitude of oscillation at this point is known to be 2A. The displacement of air particles in
terms of A, at a point 55 m away from the source at the moment t = 0 is − xA . Find the value of x. Consider
55
displacement of particles to be positive if it is away from the source.
SECTION-II (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 4)
Numerical Answer type Questions (Upto Second Decimal Place) 1 Q. [4 M (0)]
3. AB is a cylinder of length 1m fitted a thin flexible diaphragm C at the middle and other thin flexible diaphragms
A and B at the ends. The portions AC and BC contain hydrogen and oxygen gases respectively. The diaphragms

Rankers Academy JEE

A and B are set into vibrations of same frequency. What is the minimum frequency of these vibration for which
diaphragm C is a node ? (Under the conditions of experiment vH = 1100 m/s, vO = 300 m/s).
2 2

SECTION-III : (Maximum Marks: 20)

Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 5 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. A super car is moving with velocity 150 m/sec towards a fixed wall producing a sound of frequency 75 Hz.
Speed of sound is 300 m/sec then find the wavelength (in m) of reflected sound.
2. An open organ pipe containing air resonates in fundamental mode due to a tuning fork. The measured values of
length ℓ (in cm) of the pipe and radius r (in cm) of the pipe are ℓ = 94 ± 0.1, r = 5 ± 0.05. The velocity of the
sound in air is accurately known. The maximum percentage error in the measurement of the frequency of that
tuning fork by this experiment is given by α 2%. Find the value of 10 α .
3. A plane longitudinal wave having angular frequency ω = 500 rad/s is travelling in positive X direction in a medium
of density ρ = 1 kg/m3 and bulk modulus 4 × 104 N/m2 . The loudness at a point in the medium is observed to be
20dB. The pressure amplitude of the pressure wave is given has α × 10 –4 N/m2. Find the value of α .

PHYSICS/ GR_SOUND WAVE (7) E-7/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

4. A ball of radius R = 100 cm is located in the way of propagation of a plane sound wave. The sonic wavelength
is λ = 2 cm, the frequency is ν = 100 π Hz, the pressure oscillation amplitude in air is ( Δ p)m = 4 Pa. Find the
mean energy flow rate (in watt), averaged over an oscillation period, reaching the surface of the ball. Take
density of air 1 kg/m3.
5. A tuning fork of known frequency is held at the open end of a long tube which is dipped into water as shown in
the figure. The tuning fork of frequency 165 Hz resonates when air columns have length ℓ 1 = 50 ± 0.5 cm and
ℓ 2 = 150 ± 0.1 cm. If the speed of sound in air is [330 ± α (0.99)] m/s then the value of α is ________

Rankers Academy JEE

ANSWER KEY GR_SOUND WAVE
PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SECTION-I(i)
A. A B B C D A C C C
Q. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
SECTION-I(ii)
A. A,C A,B,C,D A,C C,D A,C B,D A,B,C A,B,D

Q. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SECTION-I(iii)
A. A B D B A D A
Q. 1 2
SECTION-II (i)
A. 5.00 4.00
Q. 3
SECTION-II (ii)
A. 1650
Q. 1 2 3 4 5
SECTION-III
A. 2 4 2 4 2

E-8/8 (8) PHYSICS/ GR_SOUND WAVE

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_WAVE OPTICS
SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:51)
Single Correct Answer Type 17 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. Observe the set up shown in the figure. What will be the position of the central maxima on the screen? Source
S is d/2 distance below the optical axis and the optical axis is equal distance below the central line. (The
separation between the slits is d and separation between the plane of slit and the screen is D and focal length of
lens is F.) Also F >> d, D >>d

(A) Dd (B) Dd (C) Dd (D) None

2F F 3F
2. A monochromatic light source of wavelength λ is placed at S. Three slits S1, S2 and S3, source S and point P
is shown in the figure. If S1P – S2P = λ /6 and S1P – S3P = 2 λ /3 and Ι be the intensity at P when only one slit
is open, the intensity at P when all the three slits are open is :-

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) 3Ι (B) 5Ι (C) 8Ι (D) 0

3. Plane wavefronts are incident on a glass slab which has refractive index as a function of distance Z, according
to the relation μ = μ −0 (1 – Z2 / Z02 ), where μ 0 is the refractive index along the axis and Z0 is a constant. This
glass slab can act as lens of focal length F. By using the concept of optical path length calculate the focal
length of the slab. Consider t to be very small as compared to F.
[Hint : Equate the OPL of ray (1) and ray (2)]

(A) Z02 /(2 μ 0t) (B) Z02 /( μ 0t) (C) μ 0 Z02 /(2t) (D) None
PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE OPTICS E-1/12
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

4. One requires 11eV of energy to dissociate a carbon monoxide molecule into carbon and oxygen atoms. The
minimum frequency of the appropriate electromagnetic radiation to achieve the dissociation lies in
(A) visible region (B) infrared region
(C) ultraviolet region (D) microwave region
5. A linearly polarized electromagnetic wave given as E→ = E0 ^i cos(kz − ω t) is incident normally on a perfectly
reflecting infinite wall at z = 0. Assuming that the material of the wall is optically inactive, the reflected wave
will be given as
(A) → = −E ^i cos(kz − ω t)
E (B) → = E ^i cos(kz + ω t)
E
r 0 r 0

(C) → r = −E0 ^i cos(kz + ω t)

E (D) → r = E0 ^i sin(kz − ω t)
E

6. The electric field intensity produced by the radiations coming from 100 W bulb at a 3m distance is E. The
electric field intensity produced by the radiations coming from 50 W bulb at the same distance is
(A) E (C) E
(B) 2E (D) √ 2E
2 √ 2
7. Electromagnetic wave consists of periodically oscillating electric and corresponding magnetic vectors .............
(A) in randomly oriented planes but vibrating in phase.

Rankers Academy JEE

(B) in mutually perpendicular planes but vibrating in phase.
(C) in mutually perpendicular planes but vibrating with a phase difference of π .
(D) in mutually perpendicular planes but vibrating with a phase difference of π /2.
8. A flood light is covered with a filter that transmits red light. The electric field of the emerging beam is
represented by a sinusoidal plane wave Ex = 36 sin (1.20 × 107 z – 3.6 × 1015 t) V/m. The average intensity of
the beam will be-
(A) 0.86 W/m2 (B) 1.72 W/m2 (C) 3.44 W/m2 (D) 6.88 W/m2
9. An electromagnetic wave of frequency 1 x 1014 hertz is propagating along z-axis. The amplitude of electric
C2
field is 4 V/m. If ε 0 = 8.8 × 10−12 , then average energy density of electric field will be:
N − m2
(A) 35.2 × 10−10 J/m3 (B) 35.2 × 10−11 J/m3 (C) 35.2 × 10−12 J/m3 (D) 35.2 × 10−13 J/m3

10. A plane electromagnetic wave of angular frequency ω propagates in a poorly conducting medium of
conductivity σ and relative permittivity ε . Find the ratio of conduction current density and displacement
current density in the medium.
(A) ε ε 0 ω (B) σ (C) ω (D) ω σ
σ ε ε0 ω σ ε0 ε ε0 ε

E-2/12 PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE OPTICS

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

11. The electric field of a plane polarized electromagnetic wave in free space at time t = 0 is given by an
expression E→ (x, y) = 10j^, cos [(6x + 8z)] The magnetic field B→ (x, z, t) is given by : (c is the velocity of light)
(A) 1 ^ ^ (B) 1 ^ ^
(6k + 8i ) cos[(6x − 8z + 10ct)] (6k − 8i ) cos[(6x + 8z − 10ct)]
c c
(C) 1 ^ ^ (D) 1 ^ ^
(6k + 8i ) cos[(6x + 8z − 10ct)] (6k − 8i ) cos[(6x + 8z + 10ct)]
c c
12. An observer is standing 90 cm away from a point source of light of power 250W. RMS value of electric field
due to the source at the position of the observer is :-
(A) 48V/m (B) 96V/m (C) 40V/m (D) 80V/m
13. The Sun is directly overhead and you are facing toward the north. Light coming to your eyes from the sky just
above the horizon is :-
(A) Partially polarized north-south (B) Partially polarized east,west
(C) Partially polarized up-down (D) Randomly polarized
14. The angle of incidence of light is equal to Brewster's angle, then
(a) reflected ray is perpendicular to refracted ray
(b) refracted ray is parallel to reflected ray
(c) reflected light is polarized having its magnetic field vector in the plane of incidence

Rankers Academy JEE

(d) refracted light is polarized
(A) (a) and (d) are true
(C) (a) and (c) are true
(B) (a) and (b) are true
(D) (b) and (c) are true
15. The resolving power of a lens can be improved by increasing :
(A) Diameter of the lens (B) The object distance
(C) The wavelength of light (D) The brightness of light
16. In single slit fraunhoffer diffraction pattern, resultant ampitude at the centre of central maxima is A0 and it is A
A
at an angluar position of 30º. Then will be - [Slit width a = λ ]
A0
(A) π (B) 2 (C) π (D) 4
2 π 4 π
17. An electromagnetic wave with a frequency of v = 3.0 MHz passes from vacuum to a non-magnetic medium
with a dielectric constant ε r = 4.0. The change in its wavelength is :-
(A) 50 (B) 60 (C) 70 (D) 80

PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE OPTICS E-3/12

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 52)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 13 Q. [4 M (–2)]
18. The figure shows two points source which emit light of wavelength λ in phase with each other and are at a
distance d = 5.5 λ apart along a line which is perpendicular to a large screen at a distance L from the centre of
the source. Assume that d is much less than L. Which of the following statement is (are) correct?

(A) Five bright fringes appear on the screen (B) Six bright fringes appear on the screen
(C) Point y = 0 corresponds to bright fringe (D) Point y = 0 corresponds to dark fringe.
19. A lens of focal length f = 40 cm is cut along the diameter into two equal halves. In this process, a layer of
thickness t = 1mm is lost, then halves are put together to form a composite lens. In between focal plane and the
composite lens a narrow slit is placed very close to the focal plane |u| < |f|. The slit is emitting monochromatic
light of wavelength 0.6 µm. Behind the lens a screen is located at a distance L = 0.5 m from it as shown :-

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) Fringe width is 0.12 mm (B) Fringe width is 0.24 mm.
(C) Length of interference pattern is 1/8 cm (D) Length of interference pattern is 1/16 cm
20. For the biprism experiment shown in the figure, the fringe width increases when

(A) biprism is moved towards the slit

(B) entire apparatus is submerged in a liquid having R.I. less than that of prism
(C) a biprism having smaller angle α is used
(D) the slit width is reduced
E-4/12 PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE OPTICS
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

21. When monochromatic light is incident normally on a wedge-shaped thin air film, refer figure, an interference
pattern may be seen by reflection. Which of the following is/are correct?

(A) Parallel fringes are observed

(B) If water is introduced into the region between the plates, the fringe separation decreases
(C) If the angle of the wedge is increased, the fringe separation decreases
(D) When white light is used there will not be a completely dark fringe
22. Two microwave coherent point sources emitting waves of wavelength λ are placed at 5 λ distance apart. The
interference is being observed on a flat non-reflecting surface along a line passing through one source, in a
direction perpendicular to the line joining the two sources (refer figure). Considering λ as 4 mm, the positions
of maxima. (Take initial phase difference between the two sources to be zero.)

(C) 32 (D) 9

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) 48 (B) 21
3 4
23. In the figure shown S is a monochromatic point source emitting light of wavelength λ = 500 nm. A thin lens
of circular shape and focal length 0.10 m is cut into two identical halves L1 and L2 by a plane passing
through a diameter. The two halves are placed symmetrically about the central axis SO with a gap of 0.5 mm.
The distance along the axis from S to L1 and L2 is 0.15 m, while that from L1 & L2 to O is 1.30 m. The
screen at O is normal to SO.

(A) If the third intensity maximum occurs at the point A on the screen, find the distance OA is 1mm.
(B) If the gap between L1 & L2 is reduced from its original value of 0.5 mm, will the distance OA
increase
(C) If the gap between L1 & L2 is reduced from its original value of 0.5 mm, will the distance OA
decrease
(D) If the gap between L1 & L2 is reduced from its original value of 0.5 mm, will the distance OA
remain the same
PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE OPTICS E-5/12
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

24. An electromagnetic wave travelling along z-axis is given as: E→ = E0 cos(kz − ω t). Choose the correct options
from the following;
(A) The associated magnetic field is given as B→ = 1→ → 1 → →
k × E = (k × E )
c ω
(B) The electromagnetic field can be written in terms of the associated magnetic field as E→ = c (
→ × k^ )
B

(C) ^ → ^ →
k. E = 0, k. B =0

(D) ^ → ^ →
k×E = 0, k × B =0
25. A plane electromagnetic wave propagating along x direction can have the following pairs of E and B
(A) Ex, By (B) Ey, Bz (C) Bx, Ey (D) Ez, By
26. A capacitor with circular plates of radius R is charged with a constant current I as shown. Which of the
following are correct?

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) Poynting vector points radially inward everywhere on the circle.
(B) Magnetic field is clockwise as seen from above.
(C) Magnetic energy density is increasing with time.
(D) Poynting vector flux is equal to the rate of change of stored energy.
27. A long straight cable of length ℓ is placed symmetrically along z-axis and has radius a(<< Ι). The cable
consists of a thin wire and a co-axial conducting tube. An alternating current Ι(t) = Ι0sin(2 π ν t) flows down the
central thin wire and returns along the co-axial conducting tube. The induced electric field at a distances from
the wire inside the cable is E→ (s, t) = μ 0 I0 ν cos(2 π ν t) ln s k^
( )
a
(A) The displacement current density inside the cable is 2π a ^
I0 ln( ) sin(2 π ν t)k.
λ2 s
(B) The displacement current density inside the cable is 2π ν 2 a ^
I0 ln( ) sin(2 π ν t)k.
C2 s
2
(C) 2 2π
the total displacement current integrated over the cross section of the cable is ( a ) ( ) I0 sin 2 π vt
2 λ
2
(D) a 2 2π ν
the total displacement current integrated over the cross section of the cable is ( ) ( ) I0 sin 2 π ν t
2 C

E-6/12 PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE OPTICS

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

28. A plane electromagnetic wave propagates in a homogeneous and isotropic medium with ε = 3.00 and µ = 1.00.
The amplitude of the wave's electric field strength is Em = 10.0 V/m. Then correct option are :-
(A) The amplitude of the wave's magnetic field strength Hm is 46 mA/m.
(B) The amplitude of the wave's magnetic field strength Hm is 36 mA/m.
(C) The phase speed v of the wave √ 3 × 108 m/s

(D) The phase speed v of the wave √ 2 × 108 m/s

29. A plane electromagnetic wave propagate along the x-axis in vacuum. The magnitude of the wave's magnetic
field strength is Hm = 0.0500 A/m.
(A) The amplitude of the wave's electric field strength Em = 18.84 V/m
(B) The amplitude of the wave's electric field strength Em = 16.84 V/m
(C) The time-averaged density <w> of the wave's energy is 1.57 × 10 –9.
(D) The time-averaged density <w> of the wave's energy is 1.57 × 109.
30. A leaky capacitor with circular plates of radius R = 12 cm has a capacitance of 5 µF and an effective resistance
of 4 × 105 Ω . At t = 0, the potential difference across the plates is zero but is increasing at the constant rate of
2000 V/s.

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) the displacement current ID is 0.01 A
(B) the displacement current ID is 0.02 A
(C) Displacement current equals to the conduction current at t = 2s.
(D) Displacement current equals to the conduction current at t = 4s.

PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE OPTICS E-7/12

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (iii) : (Maximum Marks: 18)
Linked Comprehension Type (Single Option Correct) (3 Para × 2 Q.) [3 M (–1)]
Paragraph for Questions 31 and 32
It is known that accelerating charges radiate electromagnetic waves. This is the method of power being
radiated by a cellphone. A cell phone has an antenna in which we can assume that charges undergo oscillation
with an amplitude x0 and angular frequency ω . This average power can be assumed to depend on charge Q,
x0, ω , t0 and velocity of light c.
31. The formula for power P is (a is dimensionless constant) :-
(A) aq 2 ω 4 x20 (B) aq 2 ω 4 x20 (C) aq 4 ω 2 x0 (D) aq 4 ω 4 x20
∈ 0 c2 ∈ 0 c3 ∈ 20 c6 ∈ 20 c4
32. A cell phone radiates 3W power at 300 MHz. If a = 1 , find the number of photons being emitted per unit time ?
3
(A) 1.5 × 1025 / sec (B) 8 × 1023 / sec
(C) 4 × 1019 / sec (D) Information insufficient
Paragraph for Questions 33 and 34
A parallel-plate capacitor with round plates is charged with steady current during the time τ to a voltage of U.

Rankers Academy JEE

The separation distance is d. Imagining that there is a cylindrical surface between the plates coaxial to them
whose radius r is much smaller than the radius of the plates.
33. The magnitude of the Poynting vector at points of the surface is :-
(A) r ε 0 u2 t (B) r ε 0 u2 t (C) r2 ε 0 u2 t (D) r ε 0 u2 t
2 τ 2d2 τ 2d2 2 τ 2d3 2 τ 2d
34. the amount of energy W flowing through the surface during the time t. Compare W with the energy of the
electric field contained in the volume V confined by the surface after completion of the charging process.
(A) 3 ε 0 u2 π r2 (B) ε 0 u2 π r2 (C) ε 0 u2 π r3 (D) ε 0 u2 π d 2
2d 2d 2d 2 2r
Paragraph for Questions 35 and 36
The current in a very long solenoid increases uniformly form zero to Ι during the time t. The number of
solenoid turns per unit length is n. Imagining inside the solenoid in its middle part a closed surface coaxial to
it of length ℓ and radius r.
35. the magnitude of the Poynting vector at points of the surface;
(A) μ 0 n2 I 2 r (B) 3 μ 0 n2 I 2 r (C) 3 μ 0 n2 I 2 r (D) μ 0 n2 I 2 r2
t t t t
2τ 2 2τ 2 2τ 2τ 2
36. The amount of energy W flowing through the surface during the time t. Compare W with the energy of the
magnetic field contained in the volume V confined by the surface after the current Ι has set in.
(A) μ 0 n2 I 2 π r2 ℓ (B) μ 0 n2 I 2 π r2 ℓ (C) μ 0 n2 I 2 π r2 ℓ (D) μ 0 n2 I 2 π r2 ℓ
4 2 8

E-8/12 PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE OPTICS

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-II : (Maximum Marks: 16)
Numerical Answer type Questions (Upto Second Decimal Place) 4 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. In a Young's experiment, the upper slit is covered by a thin glass plate of refractive index 1.4 while the lower
slit is covered by another glass plate having the same thickness as the first one but having refractive index 1.7.
Interference pattern is observed using light of wavelength 5400 Å. It is found that the point P on the screen
where the central maximum (n = 0) fell before the glass plates were inserted now has 3/4 the original intensity.
It is further observed that what used to be the 5th maximum earlier, lies below the point P while the 6th
minimum lies above P. Calculate the thickness of the glass plate (in µm). (Absorption of light by glass plate
may be neglected)
2. A thin film of a specific material can be used to decrease the intensity of reflected light. There is destructive
interference of waves reflected from upper and lower surfaces of the film. These films are called anti-reflection
coating. Magnesium fluoride (MgF2) is used as anti-reflecting coating on plane glass surface for light having
wavelength 500 nm and normal incidence. The minimum thickness of film required is 100 nm. Find refractive
index of magnesium fluoride. It is known that refractive index of glass is more than refractive index of
magnesium fluoride.
3. Magnitude of average poynting vector at the surface of sun is n × 107 W2 . Find n. (Given that power radiated
m
by sun is 3.8 × 1026 W and radius of sun is 7 × 108 m)
4. cal
Earth recieves 2 solar energy the amplitude of electric field at Earth's surface is.

Rankers Academy JEE

min cm2

SECTION-III : (Maximum Marks: 8)

Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 2 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. An infinitely long thin wire carrying a uniform linear static charge density λ is placed along the z-axis figure.
The wire is set into motion along its length with a uniform velocity →v = vk^ z . the pointing vector at point (a, 0,
n λ 2v ^
0) is k. Fill n in OMR Sheet.
8 π 2 ε 0 a2

2. A plane electromagnetic wave with ω of the order of 1010 s –1 propagates in a vacuum. The amplitude of the
wave's electric vector is Em = 0.775 V/m. A wave-absorbing surface having the shape of hemisphere of radius r
= 0.632 m is placed in the wave's path with its vertex facing the direction of propagation of the wave. What
energy W (in mJ) will this surface absorb during the time t = 1.00 sec.
PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE OPTICS E-9/12
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-IV : (Maximum Marks: 24)
Matrix Match Type (4 × 5) (One or more options correct) 3 Q. [8 M; (for each entry +2(0)]
1. Column-I describes various arrangements to obtain interference pattern on screen.
Column-I Column-II

(A) (P) Centre of screen 'O'

is dark.

S1, S2 are pin holes.

d = 100 λ

(B) (Q) First order maxima

will not be seen.

Rankers Academy JEE

S1, S2 are slits.
d = 100.5 λ

(C) (R) Shape of fringes is

hyperbolic

S1, S2 are pin holes.

d = 0.5 λ

(D) (S) Shape of fringes is

circular.
S1, S2 are coherent point sources
with zero initial phase difference.
d = 2.5 λ
(T) Shape of fringes is
linear.
E-10/12 PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE OPTICS
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

2. Column-I shows some modifications in a standard YDSE setup. Column-II shows the associated
characteristics.
Column-I Column-II

(A) (P) Zero order maxima lies above O.

monochromatic point source S

placed in focal plane.

If a transparent mica sheet is

(B) (Q) introduced infront of S2 central
monochromatic parallel beam bright fringe can be obtained at O.
incident on S1S2 through

Rankers Academy JEE

transparent slabs of same
thickness but µ1 > µ2

(C) (R) Fringe width β = λ D

d
monochromatic parallel beam
incident on a right angled
isosceles prism of refractive index
1.50.

(D) (S) Point O can be a minima

monochromatic parallel beam

incident on thin prism
Point O can be a least order
(T)
minima.

PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE OPTICS E-11/12

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

3. In the figure A, B and C are three slits. Intensity of light from each slit is Ι0 at point P. Wavelength of light is
λ . Match the conditions of column-I to resultant intensity at point P given in column-II.

Column-I Column-II
(A) If d2 (P) Ιp = Ιo
=λ
D
(B) If d2 λ (Q) Ιp = 4Ιo
=
D 2
2
(C) If d λ (R) Ιp = 5Ιo
=
D 4
d 2
(D) If = 2λ (S) Ιp = 9Ιo
D
Ιp = 3Ιo

Rankers Academy JEE

(T)

ANSWER KEY GR_WAVE OPTICS

Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A. A A A C B C B B C B
SECTION-I (i)
Q. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
A. B B B C A B A

Q. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
A. A,D B,C A,B,C A,B,C A,B,CA,BA,B,CB,DA,DA,B,C,D
SECTION-I (ii)
Q. 28 29 30

A. A,C A,C A,C

SECTION-I Q. 31 32 33 34 35 36
(iii) A. B A A B A C
Q. 1 2 3 4
SECTION-II
A. 9.3 1.25 6.17 1026.94
Q. 1 2
SECTION-III
A. 2 1

Q. 1 2 3
SECTION-IV A->R,B->T,C->QR,D- A->PRST,B->QRST,C->R,D- A->P,B->R,C->P,D-
A.
>PS >PRST >S

E-12/12 PHYSICS/ GR_WAVE OPTICS

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_MODERN PHYSICS
SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:33)
Single Correct Answer Type 11 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. The maximum kinetic energy of photo-electron liberated from the surface of lithium (work function = 2.35 eV)
by electromagnetic radiation whose electric component varies with time as E = a[1 + cos(2 π f1t)] cos(2 π f2t)
where 'a' is a constant, f1 = 3.6 × 1015 Hz and f2 = 1.2 × 1015 Hz is : [Take : h = 6.6 × 10 –34 J-s]
(A) 2.6 eV (B) 7.55 eV (C) 12.5 eV (D) 17.45 eV
2. Electrons with de-Broglie wavelength λ fall on the target in an X-ray tube. The cut-off wavelength of the
emitted X-rays is
(A) 2mc λ 2 (B) λ = 2h (C) λ = 2m2 c2 λ 3 (D) λ 0 = λ
λ0 = 0 0
h mc h2
3. A stationary hydrogen atom of mass M emits a photon corresponding to the longest wavelength of Balmer
series. The recoil velocity acquired by the atom is (R = Rydberg constant and h = plank's constant)
(A) Rh (B) Rh (C) 3 Rh (D) 5 Rh
M 4M 4 M 36 M

Rankers Academy JEE

4. In an X-ray experiment target is made up of copper (Z = 29) having some impurity. The K α line of copper
784
have wavelength λ 0. It was observed that another K α line due to impurity have wavelength λ 0. The
625
atomic number of the impurity element is
(A) 22 (B) 23 (C) 24 (D) 26
5. Which one of the following statements is wrong in the context of X-rays generated from a X-ray tube ?
(A) Wavelength of characteristic X-rays decreases when the atomic number of the target increases
(B) Cut-off wavelength of the continuous X-rays depends on the atomic number of the target
(C) Intensity of the characteristic X-rays depends on the electrical power given to the X-rays tube
(D) Cut-off wavelength of the continuous X-rays depends on the energy of the electrons in the X-ray
tube
6. A parallel beam of photons of intensity I strike a plane surface at angle 45° to the surface. If plane surface have
reflection coefficient 0.5 then pressure exerted by the beam on the surface (C is speed of light) is :
(A) 3I (B) 3I (C) I (D) 3I
4C 2C 2√2C 2√2C

PHYSICS/ GR_MODERN PHYSICS E-1/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL

7. The positions of 21 D, 42 He and 73 Li are shown on the binding energy curve as shown in figure.
The energy released in the fusion reaction. 21 D + 73 Li → 2 42 He + 10 n

8. Rankers Academy JEE

(A) 20 MeV
The radionuclide 11
Given that m(11
(B) 16 MeV
+
6 C decays by β emission.

6 C ) = 11.011434 u
(C) 8 MeV (D) 1.6 MeV

11
m(5 B) = 11.009305 u
me = 0.000548 u, 1u = 931.5 MeV/c2
The Q-value of this decay process is :-
(A) 0.962 MeV (B) 0.962 × 103 MeV
(C) 0.962 eV (D) 0
9. For a substance the average life for α -emission is 1620 years and for β emission is 405 years. After how much
time the 1/4 of the material remains by simultaneous emission :-
(A) 648 years (B) 324 years (C) 449 years (D) 810 years
10. Tritium (31 H ), an isotope of hydrogen with a half life of 12.3 year, is produced in the upper atmosphere by
cosmic rays and is intimately mixed with the hydrogen in air. In order to determine the age of a bottle of wine
found in an ancient cave, the tritium in the wine is measured and found to be 6.9% of that found in new wine.
How old is the wine in bottle?
(A) 59.20 years (B) 47.5 years (C) 37.5 years (D) 53.2 years

E-2/8 PHYSICS/ GR_MODERN PHYSICS

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL

11. The electrostatic energy of Z protons uniformly distributed throughout a spherical nucleus of radius R is given
3 Z(Z − 1)e2
by E =
5 4 π ε 0R
The measured masses of the neutron, 11 H , 15 15
7 N and 8 O are 1.008665 u, 1.007825 u, 15.000109 u and 15.003065
u respectively. Given that the radii of both the 15 15 2
7 N and 8 O nuclei are same, 1u = 931.5 MeV/c (c is the speed
e2
of light) and = 1.44 MeV fm. Assuming that the difference between the binding energies of 15
7 N and
(4 π ε 0 )
15
8 O is purely due to the electrostatic energy, the radius of either of the nuclei is (1fm = 10 –15m)
(A) 2.85 fm (B) 3.03 fm (C) 3.42 fm (D) 3.80 fm
SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 12)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 3 Q. [4 M (–2)]
12. A moving neutron collides with stationary H-atom in ground state. As a result it excites and then de excites.
The corresponding radiation fall on a surface, having work function σ . The minimum value of required kinetic
energy for neutron is E0 and possible minimum value of de broglie wavelength of emitted photoelectrons is λ 0.
If neutron hits stationary He+ ion instead of stationary H atom, then minimum value of kinetic energy for
neutron is E1. Then
(A) The value of energy transferred from neutron to H-atom is 3E0

Rankers Academy JEE

.
4
(B) The value of λ is h
.
0
√ me (E0 − 2 σ )
(C) The value of E1 is 4E0
(D) The value of E is 5E0
1 2
13. A radioactive sample has a half life of 40 seconds. When its activity is measured 80 seconds after the begining,
it is found to be 6.932 × 1018 dps. During this time total energy released is 6 × 108 joule ( ℓ n2 = 0.6932) :-
(A) The initial number of atoms in the sample is 1.6 × 1020
(B) The initial number of atoms in the sample is 1.6 × 1021
(C) Energy released per fission is 5 × 10 –13 J
(D) Energy released per fission is 5
× 10 –13 J
3

PHYSICS/ GR_MODERN PHYSICS E-3/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL

14. Assume that the nuclear binding energy per nucleon (B/A) versus mass number (A) is as shown in the figure.
Use this plot to choose the correct choice(s) given below :

(A) Fusion of two nuclei with mass numbers lying in the range of 1 < A < 50 will release energy
(B) Fusion of two nuclei with mass numbers lying in the range of 51 < A < 100 will release energy
(C) Fission of a nucleus lying in the mass range of 100 < A < 200 will release energy when broken
into two equal fragments
(D) Fission of a nucleus lying in the mass range of 200 < A < 260 will release energy when broken
into two equal fragments
SECTION-I (iii) : (Maximum Marks: 24)

Rankers Academy JEE

Linked Comprehension Type (Single Option Correct) (2 Para × 3 Q.) (1 Para × 2 Q.) [3 M (–1)]

Paragraph for Questions 15 - 17

A light of wavelength λ is incident on a metal sheet of work function ϕ = 2 eV. The wavelength l varies with
time as λ = 3000 + 40t, where λ is in Å and t is in second. The power incident on metal sheet is constant at
100 W. This signal is switched on and off for time intervals of 2 minutes and 1 minute respectively. Each
time the signal is switched on, the λ start from initial value of 3000 Å. The metal plate is grounded and
electron clouding is negligible. The efficiency of photoemission is 1%
(hc = 12400 eV Å, 1eV = 1.6 × 10 –19 J)
15. The time after which photoemission will stop is :-
(A) 120 s (B) 80 s (C) 60 s (D) 180 s
16. The total number of photoelectrons ejected in one hour is :-
(A) 3.71 × 1017 (B) 3.71 × 1021 (C) 3.71 × 1025 (D) 3.71 × 107

E-4/8 PHYSICS/ GR_MODERN PHYSICS

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL

17. The variation of rate of emission vs time is :-

(A)
(B)

(C) (D)

Paragraph for Questions 18 - 20

Polonium (P0210 )
emits 2 particles and is converted into lead (82 P b206 ). This reaction is used for
α4

Rankers Academy JEE

producing electric power in a space mission: P0210 has half life of 138.6 days. (Given masses of the nuclei)
P0210 = 209.98264 amu, Pb206 = 205.97440, 2 α 4 = 4.00260 amu)
18. Assuming an efficiency of 10% of the thermoelectric machine, how much P0210 is required to produce 1.2 × 107
J of electric energy per day at the end of 693 days?
(A) 1.0 gm (B) 2.0 gm (C) 3.0 gm (D) 0.5 gm
19. What is the initial amount of P0210 ?
(A) 16 gm (B) 8 gm (C) 32 gm (D) 64 gm
20. Find the initial activity of the material.
(A) 4.57 × 1021 per day (B) 3.57 × 1021 per day
(C) 2.28 × 1021 per day (D) 1.785 × 1021 per day

PHYSICS/ GR_MODERN PHYSICS E-5/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL

Paragraph for Questions 21 and 22

The β -decay process, discovered around 1900, is basically the decay of a neutron (n). In the laboratory, a
proton (p) and an electron (e – ) are observed as the decay products of the neutron. Therefore, considering the
decay of a neutron as a two-body decay process, it was predicted theoretically that the kinetic energy of the
electron should be a constant. But experimentally, it was observed that the electron kinetic energy has a
continuous spectrum. Considering a three-body decay process, i.e. n → p + e – + →ve , around 1930, Pauli
explained the observed electron energy spectrum. Assuming the anti-neutrino (→ve ) to be massless and
possessing negligible energy, and the neutron to be at rest, momentum and energy conservation principles are
applied. From this calculation, the maximum kinetic energy of the electron is 0.8 × 106 eV. The kinetic
energy carried by the proton is only the recoil energy.
21. If the anti-neutrino had a mass of 3 eV/c2 (where c is the speed of light) instead of zero mass, what should be
the range of the kinetic energy, K, of the electron?
(A) 0⩽K ⩽ 0.8 × 106 eV (B) 3.0eV ⩽ K ⩽ 0.8 × 106 eV

(C) 3.0eV ⩽ K < 0.8 × 106 eV (D) 0 ⩽ K < 0.8 × 106 eV

22. What is the maximum energy of the anti-neutrino?

(A) zero (B) much less than 0.8 ×106 eV

Rankers Academy JEE

(C) Nearly 0.8 × 106 eV (D) Much larger than 0.8 × 106 eV
SECTION-I (v) : (Maximum Marks: 3)
Matching list Type (Single Option Correct) 1Q. [3 M (–1)]
23. Match List I of the nuclear processes with List II containing parent nucleus and one of the end products of each
process and then select the correct answer using the codes given below the lists :
List I List II
(P) Alpha decay (1) 15 O →15
8 7 N+. . . . .

(Q) β + decay (2) 238

92 U →234
90 T h+. . . . .
185
(R) Fission (3) 83 Bi →184
82 P b+. . . . .
239
(S) Proton emission (4) 94 P u →140
57 La+. . . . .

(A) P → 4;Q → 2;R → 1;S → 3

(B) P → 1;Q → 3;R → 2;S → 4
(C) P → 2;Q → 1;R → 4;S → 3
(D) P → 4;Q → 3;R → 2;S → 1

E-6/8 PHYSICS/ GR_MODERN PHYSICS

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-II (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 12)
Numerical Answer type Questions (Upto Second Decimal Place) 3 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. A beam of light has three wavelengths 4144 Å, 4972 Å & 6216 Å with a total intensity of 3.6 × 10 –3 W.m –2
equally distributed amongst the three wavelengths. The beam falls normally on an area 1.0 cm2 of a clean
metallic surface of work function 2.3 eV. Assume that there is no loss of light by reflection and that each
energetically capable photon ejects one electron. The number of photoelectrons liberated in two seconds
are_________x × 1012.
2. Assume that the de-Broglie wave associated with an electron can form a standing wave between the atoms
arranged in a one dimensional array with nodes at each of the atomic sites. It is found that one such standing
wave is formed if the distance 'd' between the atoms of the array is 2 Å. A similar standing wave is again
formed if 'd' is increased to 2.5 Å but not for any intermediate value of d. Find the energy of the electrons in
electron volts :
3. A neutron of kinetic energy 65 eV collides inelastically with a singly ionized helium atom at rest . It is
scattered at an angle of 90º with respect of its original direction. (Given : Mass of He atom = 4 × (mass of
neutron), ionization energy of H atom =13.6 eV). If the allowed values of the energy of the neutron is x and
that of the atom after collision is y then fill (x + y) in OMR.
SECTION-III : (Maximum Marks: 32)
Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 8 Q. [4 M (0)]

Rankers Academy JEE

1. An electron is confined to a tube of length L. Its potential energy in first half of the tube is zero, while the
potential energy in other half is 12 eV. If the total energy of electron is 16 eV, find the ratio of the longest to
the shortest de Broglie wavelength of an electron in the tube.
2. A potential difference of V volts is applied on two parallel electrodes separated by a distance of 4.0 × 10-2 m.
The electrons of very low energy are injected into the region between the electrodes which contains argon at
low pressure. The average distance the electrons travel between collisions with argon atoms is 8 × 10-5 m. The
ionization energy of argon atom is 16 eV. Estimate the minimum value of V(in kV) such that the electrons
will cause ionization in argon atoms by collision -
3. When 0.50 Å X-rays strike a material, the photoelectrons from the K shell are observed to move in a circle of
radius 23 mm in a magnetic field of 2 × 10 –2 T. The binding energy of K-shell electrons is a2 × 100 eV then
write the value of a in your OMR sheet ?
(Take : mass of electron = 9.2 × 10 –31 kg & hc = 12400 eV – Å)
4. Consider a universe in which the π -meson orbits around the nucleus instead of electron. Assuming a Bohr
model for a π -meson of mass m π and of the same charge as the electron is in a circular orbit of radius r about
the nucleus with an orbital angular momentum h . If the radius of a nucleus of atomic number Z is given by R
2π
= 1.6 × 10 –15 Z1/3 m. The total number of elements in this universe that can exist is given as ‘N’. Fill
N −1 ε 0 h2 mπ
[ ] in OMR sheet. [ Given = 0.53 Å; = 265; neglect any shielding effect for the havier
12 π me e 2 me
atoms and assume non relativistic physics to be applicable and take 51/4 ≈ 1.5]

PHYSICS/ GR_MODERN PHYSICS E-7/8

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL

5. A silver sphere of radius 1 cm and work function 4.7 eV is suspended from an insulating thread in free-space.
It is under continuous illumination of 200 nm wavelength light. As photoelectrons are emitted, the sphere gets
charged and acquires a potential. The maximum number of photoelectrons emitted from the sphere is A × 10z
(where 1 < A < 10). The value of ‘Z’ is
6. A small quantity of solution containing 24Na radionuclide (half life 15 hours) of activity 1.0 microcurie is
injected into the blood of a person. A sample of the blood of volume 1 cm3 taken after 5 hours shows an
activity of 296 distintegration per minute. Determine the total volume of blood in the body of the person.
Assume that the radioactive solution mixes uniformly in the blood of the person.
(1 Curie = 3.7 × 1010 disintegrations per second)
7. ∣ dN (t) ∣
To determine the half life of a radioactive element, a student plots a graph of ℓ n ∣ ∣ versus t. Here
∣ dt ∣
dN (t)
is the rate of radioactive decay at time t. If the number of radioactive nuclei of this element decreases
dt
by a factor of p after 4.16 years, the value of p is

8. Rankers Academy JEE

Geiger counter reading of a radioactive sample is initially 6800 counts per min. The same sample gives a
reading of 425 counts per min 10 hrs later. The sample's half life of α hr. Fill 2 α in OMR sheet.
SECTION-IV : (Maximum Marks: 8)
Matrix Match Type (4 × 5) (One or more options correct) 1 Q. [8 M; (for each entry +2(0)]
1. Column-I shows possible inferences on events given in column-II.
Column-I Column-II
(A) Not possible (P) Conversion of a free proton to a neutron.
A neutron with kinetic energy 15 eV is incident on a stationary
(B) Possible (Q) hydrogen atom in ground state on a stationary hydrogen atom in
ground state such that excitation of H atom occurs.
(C) Release of energy (R) Conversion of a neutron to proton outside nucleus.
A chargeless particle
A nuclei emits electromagnetic radiation without emitting α or β
(D) carrying momentum is (S)
particles.
emitted.
(T) A thermal particle causing fission of nucleus.

E-8/8 PHYSICS/ GR_MODERN PHYSICS

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER
PHASE : ALL
ANSWER KEY GR_MODERN PHYSICS
PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A. D A D D B A B A C B
SECTION-I (i)
Q. 11
A. C

Q. 12 13 14
SECTION-I (ii)
A. A,B,D B,C B,D
Q. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SECTION-I (iii)
A. B B B A A A D C
Q. 23
SECTION-I (v)
A. C
Q. 1 2 3
SECTION-II (ii)
A. 1.1 151.00 16.640 to 24.20
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SECTION-III
A. 2 8 8 3 7 6 8 5

Q. 1
SECTION-IV
A. A->PQ,B->RST,C->RST,D->RST

Rankers Academy JEE

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
PHYSICS GR_ERROR
SECTION-I (i) (Maximum Marks:51)
Single Correct Answer Type 17 Q. [3 M (–1)]
1. 1
A travelling microscope has a main scale graduated in mm. 50 vernier divisions coincide with 49 main scale
2
divisions. What will be the reading if the main scale reads 7.45 cm and the 29th division of the vernier
coincides with the main scale division ?
(A) 7.459 cm (B) 7.453 cm (C) 7.479 cm (D) 7.48 cm
2. In an experiment to determine the inertial mass of an object using Newton's second law, following graph is
obtained between net force on the object and the acceleration produced in it. The mass of the object within
error limits is :-

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) 1.0 kg (B) 1 kg (C) (1.0 ± 0.1) kg (D) (1.0 ± 0.15)kg
3. The circular scale of a micrometer has 200 divisions and pitch of 2mm. Find the measured value of thickness
of a thin sheet.

(A) 3.41 mm (B) 6.41 mm (C) 3.46 mm (D) 3.51 mm

4. A screw gauge has a screw having 2 threads in 1 mm. The circular scale has 50 divisions. Find the diameter of
wire, if the main scale shows 6th division and the vernier reads 46.
(A) 6.46 mm (B) 3.46 mm (C) 6.54 mm (D) 3.04 mm

PHYSICS/ GR_ERROR E-1/9

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

5. When a piece of wire is held diametrically in a screw gauge [pitch = 1mm, number of division on circular scale
= 100]. The readings obtained are as shown :

Now if we measure the same with help of vernier callipers [1 MSD = 1mm, 10 divisions of vernier coinciding
with 9 divisions of main scale] having a negative zero error of 0.5 mm, then find which of the following
figures correctly represents the reading.
(A) (B)

(C) (D)

6.
Rankers Academy JEE
A student obtained following observations in an experiment of meter bridge to find the unknown resistance of
the circuit :
100 − ℓ
[Link]. R ℓ 100 – ℓ S=( ) R
ℓ
1 20 Ω 43 57 26.51 Ω
2 30 Ω 51 49 28.82 Ω
3 40 Ω 59 41 27.80 Ω
4 60 Ω 70 30 25.71 Ω
The most accurate value of unknown resistance is :-
(A) 26.51 Ω (B) 28.82 Ω (C) 27.80 Ω (D) 25.71 Ω
7. Relative density of the material of a body is found by weighing it first in air and then in water. The weight in
air is (5.00 ± 0.05) newton and weight in water is (4.00 ± 0.05) newton. Then the relative density of material
should be:-
(A) 5.01 ± 11% (B) 5.0 ± 1% (C) 5.0 ± 6% (D) 1.25 ± 5%

E-2/9 PHYSICS/ GR_ERROR

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

8. The viscosity of a fluid µ, can be determined by measuring the terminal velocity VT of a sphere when it
descends in the fluid. The fluid has a density ρ f while the sphere has a density ρ s and a diameter of d. The
viscosity can then be calculated by the formula
5( ρ s − ρ f ) 2
μ= d
9VT
The values measured are
VT = (1.60 ± 0.04) ms –1
ρ s = (2700 ± 20) kg m –3
ρ f =(900 ± 10) kg m –3
d = (20.0 ± 0.4) mm
What is the percentage uncertainty in the value of µ?
(A) 6.2% (B) 7.1% (C) 8.2% (D) 8.4%
9. In a screw gauge, there are 100 division in circular scale and each main scale division is of 1 mm. When there
is no gap between the jaws, 97th division coincides with the main scale zero and zero of main scale is not
visible. While measuring the diameter of a ball, the circular scale is between 3 mm mark and 4 mm mark such
that the 76th division of circular scale coincides with the reference line. Select the correct alternative :
(A) The least count of the micrometer is 0.01 cm

Rankers Academy JEE

(B) The zero error is – 0.04 mm
(C) The diameter of the ball is 3.79 mm
(D) There is positive zero error in the screw guage
10. Three students make measurements of the length of a 1.50 meter rod. Each student reports an uncertainty
estimate representing an independent random error applicable to the measurement.
Alice : A single measurement using a 2.0 meter long tape measure, to within ±2 mm.
Bob : Two measurements using a wooden meter stick, each to within ±2 mm, which he adds together.
Christina : Two measurements using a machinist's meter ruler, each to within ±1 mm, which she adds
together.
The students' teacher prefers measurements that are likely to have less error. Which is the correct order of
preference?
(A) Christina's is preferable to Alice's, which is preferable to Bob's
(B) Alice's is preferable to Christina's, which is preferable to Bob's
(C) Alice's and Christina's are equally preferable; both are preferable to Bob's
(D) Christina's is preferable to both Alice's and to Bob's, which are equally preferable

PHYSICS/ GR_ERROR E-3/9

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

11. In an experiment to study standing waves, you use a string whose mass per length is
µ = (1.0 ± 0.1) × 10 –4 kg/m. You look at the fundamental mode, whose frequency f is related to the length L
1 T
and tension T of the string by the following equation L = √ . You make a plot with L on the y-axis and
2f μ
√ Ton the x-axis, and find that the best fitting line is y = (8.0 ± 0.3) × 10 –3 x + (0.2 ± 0.04) in SI units. What
is the value of the frequency of the wave (including the error)? Express your result in SI unit (Hz).
(A) 6250 ± 859.8 Hz (B) 1250 ± 32.3 Hz
(C) 6250 ± 546.9 Hz (D) 4875 ± 287 Hz
12. You measure two quantities as A = 1.0 m ± 0.2 m, B = 2.0 m ± 0.2 m. We should report correct value for √
AB
as:
(A) 1.4 m ± 0.4 m (B) 1.41m ± 0.15 m (C) 1.4m ± 0.3 m (D) 1.4m ± 0.2 m
13. In a meter bridge experiment the resistance of resistance box is 16 Ω , which is inserted in right [Link] null
point is obtained at 36cm from the left end. The least count of meter scale is 1mm. What is the value of
unknown resistance? (Error = L.C. or L.C./2)
(A) 9 ± 5 (B) 9 ± 5 (C) 5 (D) 128 1
Ω Ω 9± Ω ± Ω
128 256 512 9 2560

Rankers Academy JEE

14. In a specially designed vernier calipers, 10 divisions of the vernier scale are equal to 4 divisions of the main
scale. In the following figure, the zero error and a measurement are shown. In the zero error, the 5th and the
10th divisions of the vernier coincides with 1 mm and 3 mm mark on the main scale respectively and in the
measurement, the 2nd and the 7th divisions of the vernier scale coincide with the 23 mm and 25 mm mark on
the main scale respectively as shown in the figure. Report the length measured with due regards to the error.

(A) (21.2 ± 0.2) mm (B) (23.2 ± 0.2) mm (C) (23.8 ± 0.4) mm (D) (23.4 ± 0.6) mm
15. A student performs an experiment to determine the Young’s modulus of a wire, exactly 2m long, by Searle’s
method. In a particular reading, the student measures the extension in the length of the wire to be 0.8 mm with
an uncertainty of ±0.04 mm at a load of exactly 1.0 kg. The student also measures the diameter of the wire to
be 0.4 mm with an uncertainty of ±0.01mm. Take g = 10 m/s2 (exact). The Young’s modulus obtained from the
reading is
(A) (2.0 ± 0.3) × 1011 N/m2 (B) (2.0 ± 0.2) × 1011 N/m2
(C) (2.0 ± 0.1) × 1011 N/m2 (D) (2.0 ± 0.3) × 1011 N/m2

E-4/9 PHYSICS/ GR_ERROR

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

16. Rank the vernier callipers/screw gauge in the order of their increasing precision :
(1) Screw gauge having main scale division 1mm and no. of circular division = 200.
(2) Screw gauge having main scale division 0.5 mm and no. of circular division = 400.
(3) Vernier callipers having main scale division = 1mm such that 9 MSD = 10 VSD.
(4) Vernier callipers having main scale division = 1mm such that 4 MSD = 5 VSD.
(A) 4 < 2 < 3 < 1 (B) 2 < 4 < 1 < 3 (C) 4 < 3 < 2 < 1 (D) 4 < 3 < 1 < 2
17. To verify Ohm’s law, a student is provided with a test resistor RT, a high resistance R1, a small resistance R2,
two identical galvanometers G1 and G2, and a variable voltage source V. The correct circuit to carry out the
experiment is : –
(A) (B)

(C) (D)

Rankers Academy JEE

PHYSICS/ GR_ERROR E-5/9

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (ii) : (Maximum Marks: 8)
Multiple Correct Answer Type 3 Q. [4 M (–2)]
Paragraph for Questions 18
If the measurement errors in all the independent quantities are known, then it is possible to determine the
error in any dependent quantity. This is done by the use of series expansion and truncating the expansion at
the first power of the error. For example, consider the relation z = x/y. If the errors in x, y and z are Δ x, Δ y
and Δ z, respectively, then
−1
x ± Δx x Δx Δy
z ± Δz = =
(1 ± ) (1 ± ) .
y ± Δy y x y
Δ y −1
The series expansion for (1 ± ) , to first power in Δ y/y, is 1 ∓ ( Δ y/y). The relative errors in
y
independent variables are always added. So the error in z will be
Δx Δy
Δz = z ( + .
)
x y
Δx Δy
The above derivation makes the assumption that << 1, << 1. Therefore, the higher powers of these
x y
quantities are neglected.
18. (1 − a)
Consider the ratio r = to be determined by measuring a dimensionless quantity a. If the error in the
(1 + a)

Rankers Academy JEE

measurement of a is Δ a( Δ a/a << 1), then what is the error Δ r in determining r ?
(A) Δa (B) 2Δa (C) 2Δa (D) 2a Δ a
2 2
(1 + a) (1 + a) (1 − a2 ) (1 − a2 )

Paragraph for Questions 19

If the measurement errors in all the independent quantities are known, then it is possible to determine the
error in any dependent quantity. This is done by the use of series expansion and truncating the expansion at
the first power of the error. For example, consider the relation z = x/y. If the errors in x, y and z are Δ x, Δ y
and Δ z, respectively, then
−1
x ± Δx Δx Δy
z ± Δz = = x (1 ± ) (1 ± ) .
y ± Δy y x y
Δ y −1
The series expansion for (1 ± ) , to first power in Δ y/y, is 1 ∓ ( Δ y/y). The relative errors in
y
independent variables are always added. So the error in z will be
Δx Δy
Δz = z ( + .
)
x y
Δx Δy
The above derivation makes the assumption that << 1, << 1. Therefore, the higher powers of these
x y
quantities are neglected.
19. In an experiment the initial number of radioactive nuclei is 3000. It is found that 1000 ± 40 nuclei decayed in
the first 1.0 s. For |x| << 1, In (1 + x) = x up to first power in x. The error Δ λ , in the determination of the
decay constant λ , in s –1, is :-
(A) 0.04 (B) 0.03 (C) 0.02 (D) 0.01
E-6/9 PHYSICS/ GR_ERROR
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
SECTION-I (iii) : (Maximum Marks: 15)
Linked Comprehension Type (Single Option Correct) 1 Para × 3 Q. [3 M (–1)]
20. A teacher asks 4 students to find the speed of sound using resonance column apparatus. The set of apparatus
used by each of student was different. The frequency of tuning fork used was known precisely. He wants the
error in speed of sound to be within 1%. Which of the student(s) did the experiment correctly. Their results are
tabulated below.
Student Frequency 1st resonance 2nd resonance
(A) 476 Hz 17.0 cm 50.0 cm
(B) 340 Hz 25.2 cm 76.0 cm
(C) 544 Hz 15.6 cm 46.0 cm
(D) 510 Hz 16.0 cm 48.2 cm
21. The graph between object distance u and image distance v for a lens is given below. The value of u and v are
in centimeter. Then mark the correct statement(s).

Rankers Academy JEE

(A) The focal length of the lens is 5cm.
(B) The focal length of the lens is 0.5cm.
(C) The error in focal length is 0.05 cm
(D) The fractional error in focal length is 0.1
22. A flat circular annular disc has a mass M, outer radius a and inner radius b. The measured values of M, a and b
are, M = (0.300 kg ± 0.003 kg), a = (4 cm ± 0.01 cm) & b = (2 cm ± 0.01 cm) :-
(A) Percentage error in the calculation of a and b are same.
(B) Percentage error in the calculation of M is 1%
(C) Percentage error in the calculation of moment of inertia of the disc about an axis passing
through centre and perpendicular to plane of disc is 1.6 %.
(D) Percentage error in the calculation of moment of inertia of the disc about an axis passing
through centre and perpendicular to plane of disc is 3.2 %.

PHYSICS/ GR_ERROR E-7/9

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

23. A tuning fork of known frequency is held at the open end of a long tube, which is dipped into water as shown
in the figure. The tuning fork of frequency 165 Hz resonates in first and second harmonic when air columns
have lengths ℓ 1 = 50 ±0.5 cm and ℓ 2 = 150 ± 0.1 cm. Then

(A) Speed of sound in air is (330 ± 1.98) m/s

(B) Speed of sound in air is (330 ± 1.2) m/s
(C) Percentage maximum error in speed of sound is 0.6%
(D) Percentage maximum error in speed of sound is 0.4%
24. Figure shows an experimental setup to find the value of an unknown resistance RX using a meter bridge. AB is
uniform meter bridge wire of length L = 100 cm. When sliding jockey is at J (AJ = x), the galvanometer shows
zero deflection. Length AJ is measured by a meter scale having leastcount of 1mm. In an experiment known

Rankers Academy JEE

resistance is taken as 20 Ω length was found to be (20.0 ± 0.1)cm

(A) Value of Rx = (5.00 ± 0.03) Ω

(B) Value of Rx = (5.00 ± 0.02) Ω
(C) To minimize fractional error the known resistance should be very close to RX
(D) When fractional error is minimized x = L
2
SECTION-III : (Maximum Marks: 20)
Numerical Grid Type (Ranging from 0 to 9) 5 Q. [4 M (0)]
1. 1/2 2 ( T −T0 )

Volume of a gas undergoing certain process varis with temperature as shown V = V0 ( T0 ) e 3 T0

[ ]

where
T
T0 is initial temperature, V0 is initial volume. If apparatus rise for measuring temperature can measure
3T0
temperature with an accuracy of 0.2 k, find the percentage error in calculation of volume at temp T = (V0
4
and T0 are accurately known)
E-8/9 PHYSICS/ GR_ERROR
 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL

2. The force exerted on a length L of a wire carrying a current I by a magnetic field perpendicular to the wire is
measured in an experiment and a graph is prepared between modulus F of the force and segment length L. The
plot is a straight line, with slope s = (10 ± 1) × 10 –5 A·T. The current in the wire is Ι = (15 ± 1) mA. The
modulus of the magnetic induction in SI units, including the error is found to be (x ± y) × 10 –3 T. Find value
of x/y.
3. An open organ pipe containing air resonates in fundamental mode due to a tuning fork. The measured values of
length ℓ (in cm) of the pipe and radius r (in cm) of the pipe are ℓ = 94 ± 0.1, r = 5 ± 0.05. The velocity of the
sound in air is accurately known. The maximum percentage error in the measurement of the frequency of that
tuning fork by this experiment is given by α 2%. Find the value of 10 α .
4. A hemispherical bowl of radius R = 0.1m is rotating about its own axis (which is vertical) with an angular
velocity ω . A particle of mass 10 –2 kg on the frictionless inner surface of the bowl is also rotating with the
same ω . The particle is at a height h from the bottom of the bowl. It is desired to measure 'g' using this set up,
by measuring h accurately. Assuming that R and ω are known precisely and that the least-count in the
measurement of h is 10 –4 m, the numerical value of minimum possible error Δ g in the measured value of g is
given by α × 10−2 m/s2. Fill the value of α in OMR sheet.
5. The diameter of a wire of length 100 cm is measured with the help of a screw gauge. The main scale reading is
1 mm and circular scale is reading is 25. Pitch of the screw gauge is 1 mm and the total number of divisions on

Rankers Academy JEE

the circular scale is 100. This wire is used in an experiment of determination of Young’s modulus of a wire by
Searle’s method. The following data are available: elongation in the wire l = 0.125 cm under the tension of 50
N, least count for measuring normal length of wire is 0.01 cm and for elongation in the wire is 0.001 cm. The
maximum error in the calculating value of Young’s modulus (Y), assuming that the force is measured very
8n
accurately, is %, where n is very nearest interger. Find the value of n.
10

PHYSICS/ GR_ERROR E-9/9

 JEE (Main + Advanced) 2025
GUIDED REVISION ENTHUSIAST & LEADER COURSE
PHASE : ALL
ANSWER KEY GR_ERROR
PHYSICS
Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A. C C B B A B A C C C
SECTION-I (i)
Q. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
A. C D B B B D C

Q. 18 19
SECTION-I (ii)
A. B C
Q. 20 21 22 23 24
SECTION-I (iii)
A. B ,D A,C B,C A,C A,C,D
Q. 1 2 3 4 5
SECTION-III
A. 0 7 4 1 3

Rankers Academy JEE